JP6636722B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  According to the present invention, a variable display for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each based on a start condition being satisfied after a game medium passes through a start area provided in a game area and deriving and displaying a display result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine for controlling a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on a display means.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one that is configured. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result on the variable display unit, a predetermined game value is provided. Is provided to the player.

  The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in a state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a hit ball, That is, a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily satisfied.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, as a result of a game ball winning in a starting winning opening (starting area) and a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started on a variable display section based on a predetermined starting condition being satisfied, as a display result. In the case where a predetermined specific display mode (specific display result) is derived and displayed, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, before starting the variable display based on the passing of the game medium through the start area (start winning opening), referring to numerical data extracted when the game medium passes through the start area. There is a gaming machine configured to determine whether or not a display result is a specific display result, and to execute a notice effect (so-called pre-read notice effect) based on the result of the judgment. As such an announcement effect, there are an announcement effect in which the player can recognize the variable display as the object of the announcement effect, and an announcement effect in which the variable display as the object of the announcement effect is difficult for the player to recognize. As a notice effect that allows the player to recognize the variable display to be the target of the notice effect, a notice effect of a hold change that changes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the numerical data, and a variable display corresponding to the numerical data are given. There is an announcement effect of a countdown for notifying the remaining variable display count until the execution, and the like. Further, as a notice effect in which the variable display targeted for the notice effect is difficult for the player to recognize, the notice of the background change that changes the aspect of the background image in the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the numerical data is executed is given. There is an effect, a sound effect of outputting a special sound at the time of a winning start or a shift of the hold display, and the like. Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that executes a notice effect of a pending change and a notice effect of a countdown as a form of a notice effect in which a player can recognize a variable display to be a notice effect. Patent Document 2 discloses a gaming machine that executes a background change effect as one form of an advance effect in which a variable display to be an object of the advance effect is difficult for a player to recognize.

JP 2013-146507 A JP 2013-146460 A

  However, in these conventional techniques, both a notice effect in which a player can recognize a variable display targeted for the notice effect and a notice effect in which the player cannot easily recognize the variable display targeted for the notice effect. In a gaming machine capable of executing the game, it has not been considered to appropriately improve the gaming interest.

  Therefore, the present invention executes both a notice effect in which the player can recognize the variable display to be the notice effect and a notice effect in which the player cannot easily recognize the variable display to be the notice effect. In a possible gaming machine, an object is to appropriately improve amusement in entertainment.

The invention according to the means A,
Performs a variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, a control can be a game machine to an advantageous advantageous state for Yu technique's,
Holding storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding storage;
Determining means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied,
Examples prediction effect based on a determination result of the determining means, first prediction effect performed by the variable display to be the prediction effect is to execute the first informational display recognizable before the person the variable display is performed Means,
As the informational display, the second prediction effect be executed before those said variable display the recognized hard second prediction effect than the variable display is the first informational display to be the announcement attraction is performed Execution means,
Ratio of the first announcement attraction when the second prediction effect is executed as a target one of the variable display is performed, when said second prediction effect was not executed as a target one of the variable display rather than higher than the rate at which the first announcement attraction is performed,
In the first preview effect and the second preview effect for one variable display, the timing at which the execution of the first preview effect is started is different from the timing at which the execution of the second preview effect is started. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that:
The invention according to Means 1 is
After the game medium (game ball) has passed through the start area (first start winning opening 13 or second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area, the start condition (the case where the number of retained storages is not 0, The state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the state in which the big hit game is not executed) is established. Display (variation display of the first special symbol, variation display of the second special symbol, variation display of the effect symbol), and when a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result, the game Gaming machine controlling to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means (first hold storage, second hold storage) capable of storing data for determining whether or not to make the specific display result when the game medium passes through the starting area (first hold storage) A first pending storage buffer, a second pending storage buffer),
As a preview effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the variable display corresponding to the one hold memory is the specific display result, the hold memory targeted for the preview effect can be recognized. A first announcement effect executing means (the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the first announcement effect (advance change effect or countdown announcement effect) prior to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension memory). S67106 to S67117 of the effect setting process or S67308 to S67312 of the double change effect setting process, and S1812 or S1829 of the effect symbol change start process, and a part that executes S1832).
As the announcement effect, a second announcement effect (a background change or an announcement effect of a special sound at the time of a winning start or a hold display shift) in which the reserved memory to be subjected to the announcement effect is more difficult to recognize than the first announcement effect. Is performed before the variable display corresponding to the suspension storage is performed (the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the S67206 and S67217 of the background change effect setting process or the double change effect setting process). Of S67306 and S67307, and then performing S1817 or S1828, S1829, or S1830 of the effect symbol variation start process, and S1832).
The rate at which the first notice effect is executed when the second notice effect is executed for one hold memory (the ratio determined to execute the double change effect / [decided to execute the double change effect] Ratio + the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect]) is the ratio (holding) in which the first advance effect is executed when the second advance effect is not executed for one hold memory. Percentage that is determined to execute only the change effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, after the second advance effect (for example, the advance effect of the background change) in which the player does not easily recognize the on-hold memory to be the advance effect is executed, the hold memory to be the advance effect is stored in the game. By increasing the frequency of execution of the first notice effect (for example, the notice effect of the pending change) that can be recognized by the user, without impairing the characteristics of the notice effects of both the second notice effect and the first notice effect, Enhance the interests appropriately.

The invention according to the means B is
Performs a variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, a control can be a game machine to an advantageous advantageous state for Yu technique's,
Holding storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding storage;
Determining means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied,
Examples prediction effect based on a determination result of the determining means, first prediction effect performed by the variable display to be the prediction effect is to execute the first informational display recognizable before the person the variable display is performed Means,
As the informational display, the second prediction effect be executed before those said variable display the recognized hard second prediction effect than the variable display is the first informational display to be the announcement attraction is performed Execution means,
Ratio of the first announcement attraction when the second prediction effect is executed as a target one of the variable display is performed, when said second informational display as a target one of the variable display is performed first 1 rather than higher than the rate at which announcement attraction is not executed,
In the first preview effect and the second preview effect for one variable display, the timing at which the execution of the first preview effect is started is different from the timing at which the execution of the second preview effect is started. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that:
The invention according to Means 2 is
After the game medium (game ball) has passed through the start area (first start winning opening 13 or second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area, the start condition (the case where the number of retained storages is not 0, The state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the state in which the big hit game is not executed) is established. Display (variation display of the first special symbol, variation display of the second special symbol, variation display of the effect symbol), and when a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result, the game Gaming machine controlling to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means (first hold storage, second hold storage) capable of storing data for determining whether or not to make the specific display result when the game medium passes through the starting area (first hold storage) A first pending storage buffer, a second pending storage buffer),
As a preview effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the variable display corresponding to the one hold memory is the specific display result, the hold memory targeted for the preview effect can be recognized. A first announcement effect executing means (the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the first announcement effect (advance change effect or countdown announcement effect) prior to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension memory). S67106 to S67117 of the effect setting process or S67308 to S67312 of the double change effect setting process, and S1812 or S1829 of the effect symbol change start process, and a part that executes S1832).
As the announcement effect, a second announcement effect (a background change or an announcement effect of a special sound at the time of a winning start or a hold display shift) in which the reserved memory to be subjected to the announcement effect is more difficult to recognize than the first announcement effect. Is performed before the variable display corresponding to the suspension storage is performed (the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the S67206 and S67217 of the background change effect setting process or the double change effect setting process). Of S67306 and S67307, and then performing S1817 or S1828, S1829, or S1830 of the effect symbol variation start process, and S1832).
The rate at which the first notice effect is executed when the second notice effect is executed for one hold memory (the ratio determined to execute the double change effect / [decided to execute the double change effect) Ratio + the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect]) is the ratio (the background change effect) in which the first advance effect is not executed when the second advance effect is executed for one hold memory. Is determined to execute only the double change effect / [the ratio is determined to execute the double change effect + the ratio is determined to execute only the background change effect]),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, after the second advance effect (for example, an advance effect of a background change) in which the player cannot easily recognize the on-hold memory to be an advance effect, the hold memory to be an advance effect is stored in the game. By increasing the frequency at which the first notice effect (for example, the notice effect of the pending change) that can be recognized by the user is performed, without impairing the characteristics of the notice effects of both the second notice effect and the first notice effect, Enhance the interests appropriately.
The invention according to the means C is
A game machine of means A or B,
Further comprising a hold information display means for displaying the hold information corresponding to the hold storage,
The display mode of the suspension information includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, a first special mode and a second special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode,
The first notice effect execution means is configured to display the hold information in the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates according to the result of the determination by the determination means, and to set the hold notice effect as the first notice effect. In addition to being executable, the suspension information can be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings in the suspension notice effect.

  Here, in the means 1 and the means 2, “it is more difficult to recognize the hold memory to be the notice effect than the first notice effect” means “the variable display corresponding to the hold memory to be the notice effect (“ the notice effect ”). Is also difficult to recognize by comparing the number of times of variable display until the target variable display is executed) with the first announcement effect. " In the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the notice effect, the notice is given by the number of the hold displays corresponding to the variable display executed before the variable display targeted for the notice effect. It is possible to grasp the number of times of variable display until the variable display to be directed is executed, and to change the variable display to be performed in advance in the variable display to be performed before the variable display to be displayed in advance. In the countdown effect in which the number of variable displays up to the display is notified by voice or image, the number of variable displays up to the variable display to be the target of the announcement effect can be grasped by the notification. Each of these preview effects notifies the variable display count up to the variable display which is the target of the preview effects, and corresponds to the first preview effect. On the other hand, a background change effect that changes a background image in a variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the announcement effect is performed, or a background change effect that is performed before the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed. In the sound effect in which a special sound is output at the time of the start winning or the shift timing of the hold display, the variable display number up to the variable display which is the target of the notice effect is not notified, but the sound effect is more than the first notice effect. This corresponds to the second announcement effect in which it is difficult to recognize the variable display.

The invention according to Means 3 is
The gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2,
The first notice effect (notice effect of change of hold or countdown) and the second notice effect (notice effect of background change or special sound at start winning or hold shift) are restricted from being started at the same time. ((1) When the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the background change effect and the hold change effect for one hold memory, the background change effect is started based on the double change change timing determination table. And (2) when the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the hold change flag is set in the prefetch effect determination process. (Y in S67101), the background change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display (S6). 105e and S67105f are not executed), and (3) if the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the background change flag in the prefetch effect determination process (Y in S67101), A gaming machine characterized in that a held change effect is not executed for a variable display different from a corresponding variable display (a part where S67105d and S67105f are not executed).
According to this means, the second preview production which aims to improve the interest by not intentionally clarifying the reserved memory for the preview production is to be improved. Since it does not start at the same time as the first preview production to be performed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of the second preview production in a situation in which the player is not interested in the game, and to improve the interest of the preview production on the gaming machine. Can be done.

Further, the invention according to the means 4 is as follows.
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
After the first notice effect (hold change or countdown notice effect) is started, the second notice effect (background change or notice effect of special sound at the time of starting prize or hold shift) is started. Restricting ((1) When the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the background change effect and the hold change effect for one hold memory, the background change effect is controlled based on the change timing determination table for the double change. (2) The effect control microcomputer 100 sets the hold change flag in the prefetch effect determination process, in which the hold change effect is determined to be executed at a timing later than the start timing. In this case (Y in S67101), the background change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display ( 67105e and S67105f are not executed), thereby restricting the execution of the background change effect after the hold change effect has been executed for different variable displays). It is.
According to this means, after the first notice effect to clarify the hold memory to be the target of the notice effect and improve the interest is executed, the hold memory to be the target of the notice effect is not dared to be revealed. Since the execution of the second preview effect to improve the interest is regulated, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of the second advance effect in a situation in which the player is less interested in the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the notice production on the machine.

In addition, the invention according to the means 5 includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
After the first preview effect (reservation change or countdown preview effect) is started, the second preview effect (background change) is performed until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the first preview effect ends. Or the start of a special prize or a special sound at the time of a hold shift) is restricted (when the hold control flag is set by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the look-ahead effect determination process ( (Y in S67101), the background change effect is not executed (S67105e and S67105f are not executed), and the hold change flag is set until the change display of the target of the hold change effect ends (S854b). The pending change effect is started, and the background change effect is not performed until the variable display targeted for the pending change effect ends. To regulate to be started are) it is a game machine according to claim.
According to this means, after the first notice effect to start the first notice effect to clarify the hold memory targeted for the notice effect and to enhance the interest, the first notice effect corresponds to the hold memory to be targeted for the first notice effect. Until the variable display is over, the player is not interested in executing the second notice effect to improve the interest by intentionally not revealing the hold memory targeted for the notice effect. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of the second notice effect in a situation where it is difficult to hold, and to improve the interest of the notice effect on the gaming machine.

Further, the invention according to the means 6 is as follows.
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means are executed when the first notice effect (notice effect of change of hold or countdown) is started, the second notice is performed. The effect (preliminary effect of the background change or the special sound at the time of the start winning or the hold shift) is restricted from being started (the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the hold change effect setting process of the second embodiment in S67112a). , S67112b, S67114a, and S67114b, and a part that sets a prefetch prohibition flag in S1809a, S1809b, and S1809c in the effect symbol variation start process, and makes a determination in S67101a in the prefetch effect determination process.) .
According to this means, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest caused by the second notice effect being started immediately after the first notice effect.

Further, the invention according to the means 7 is as follows.
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
As the first preview effect, a plurality of types of first preview effects (display modes of the hold display) in which the ratio of the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the first preview effect to the specific display result is different. There is a pending change effect that changes to a first special mode (low expectation) and a pending change effect that changes to a second special mode (high expectation).
As the second advancement effect, a plurality of types of second advancement effects in which the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the second advancement effect is different from the specific display result (the mode of the background image is different from the second advancement effect). There is a background change effect that changes to one background mode (low expectation) and a background change effect that changes to the second background mode (high expectation).
When executing the second preview effect and executing the first preview effect for one hold memory, the type of the first preview effect is determined according to the type of the second preview effect (effect control). The microcomputer 100 uses the second special mode at a higher rate when the second background mode is determined based on the double change final display mode determination table than when the first background mode is determined. decide),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, the type of the first advance effect is determined according to the type of the second advance effect, so that the interest of the first advance effect performed after the execution of the second advance effect is appropriately enhanced. be able to.

Further, the invention according to the means 8 is as follows.
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
As the first announcement effect, a first type of first announcement effect (holding) in which the ratio of the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the first announcement effect to the specific display result is the first ratio A rate of change in which the display mode of the display is changed to the first special mode (low degree of expectation) and a display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the first preview effect is the specific display result A first notice effect of a second type higher than the first ratio (a change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a second special mode (high expected degree)).
As the second preview effect, a first type of second preview effect (background) in which the ratio of the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the second preview effect to the specific display result is the second ratio The ratio in which the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage to be the target of the second preview effect is the specific display result is the background change effect in which the image mode is changed to the first background mode (low expectation). A second notice effect of a second type higher than the second ratio (a background change effect of changing the mode of the background image to the second background mode (high expected degree));
In the case where the second advance effect is executed by executing the second advance effect for one hold memory, the second advance effect of the second type is executed when the second advance effect of the second type is executed. The first notice effect of the second type is executed at a higher rate than when the effect is executed. (The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the second background mode based on the double change final display mode determination table.) If determined, the second special aspect is determined at a higher rate than that determined in the first background aspect),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, when the second type of second preliminary effect is performed, the first type of preliminary effect of the second type is performed at a higher rate than when the second type of preliminary effect of the first type is executed. Since the execution is performed, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from being spoiled due to the execution of the second notice effect of the second type.

Further, the invention according to the means 9 is as follows.
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
When the second advancement effect is executed by executing the second advancement effect for one hold memory, the second advancement effect is executed after the second advancement effect is executed. The execution timing of the first announcement effect is determined according to the period until the corresponding variable display is executed (the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution timing at the time of starting winning based on the change timing determination table for double change). The change timing is delayed (the display mode of the hold display is longer) as the total number of storages on hold increases (the number of variable display times from the timing at which the background image changes to the variable display targeted for the background change effect increases). To determine the number of shifts before the change)),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, the first preview effect is performed at an appropriate timing within the period from the execution of the second preview effect to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the second preview effect. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the first noticeable effect after the execution of the second noticeable effect.

The invention according to the means 10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
When the second advancement effect is executed by executing the second advancement effect for one hold memory, the second advancement effect is executed after the second advancement effect is executed. If the period until the execution of the corresponding variable display is longer than the predetermined period, the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the second advance production is executed after the execution of the second advance production. The first notice effect is executed at a timing later than when the period until the start is within the predetermined period. The greater the total number of pending storages (the greater the number of variable displays from the timing at which the background image changes to the variable display targeted for the background change effect), the later the change timing becomes. As (the number of shifts to the hold display of the display mode is changed so that many) determined),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, the first preview effect is performed at an appropriate timing within the period from the execution of the second preview effect to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the second preview effect. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the first noticeable effect after the execution of the second noticeable effect.

The invention according to the means 11 is as follows.
After the game medium (game ball) has passed through the start area (first start winning opening 13 or second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area, the start condition (the case where the number of retained storages is not 0, A state in which the special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed, and the jackpot game is not being executed). (The first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol are displayed in a variable manner), and a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. A gaming machine controlled to a gaming state (big hit gaming state),
Numerical data extracting means for extracting numerical data when the game medium passes through the starting area (the part where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1216 and S1227 of the starting port switch passing process (FIG. 14));
Regarding the variable display in which the start condition has not been satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extracting means is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) (first storage). Hold storage means (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer) capable of storing as hold storage or second hold storage;
Holding display means for displaying the holding storage stored in the holding storage means as a holding display (total holding storage display unit 18c);
Predetermination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be the specific display result based on the satisfaction of the start condition (the microcomputer 560 for game control performs special symbol normal processing (FIGS. 17 and 18)). Steps S61, S62 and S73), and
Prior to the determination by the pre-determination means, a specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is a specific display result (the game control microcomputer 560 has a starting port). A portion for executing steps S1217 and S1228 of the switch passage process (FIG. 14).
The display mode of the hold display is a normal mode (“○” in this example: see FIG. 50 (a) (1)) and a special mode (a mode outside the “「 ”in this example) which is different from the normal mode. Six lines are drawn: see FIG. 50 (a) (2)), and a first special mode which is different from the normal mode and the special mode. Is included: see FIG. 50 (a) (3)) and the second special mode (in this example, two “×” are included in “」 ”: see FIG. 50 (a) (4)). Including
A hold announcement effect (a look-ahead effect) in which the hold display corresponding to the hold memory determined by the specific determination means is displayed in a first special mode or a second special mode at different rates according to the determination result of the specific determination means. (Steps S67106 and S67114 of the effect change control setting process (FIG. 30) by the effect control microcomputer 100, S1832 of the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 43), and the effect symbol variation process ( 46) that further includes S1845 of FIG. 46).
The effect execution means can change and display the suspension display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (starting prize timing, any shift timing, any other timing, etc.). Yes, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode (the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed in the second look-ahead effect pattern in step S67107 of the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30), and the step S67112 is performed. (When executed), the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started (effect control). S1009, S1812 of the effect symbol change start process (FIGS. 41 to 43) 1832, as well as performance symbols change during processing reference portion. FIG. 51 to FIG. 53 for executing the S1845 or the like (FIG. 46))
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a plurality of timings, so that the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display has a variety of timings. When the reserved display is displayed in the special mode, the reserved display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed.

The invention according to the means 12 is as follows:
The gaming machine of the means 11,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (the effect control microcomputer 100 determines in step S67107 that the prefetching effect is to be executed in the second prefetching effect pattern), the effect executing means executes step S67112 (start winning prize timing). Is determined to be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at an arbitrary shift timing or any other timing after the start winning prize until the fluctuation display based on the starting prize is started, and the timing is held.) The first timing until the display is displayed in a special mode and the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started (the timing at which the first shift of the hold display is performed after the start winning, or any timing). Or a second timing different from the first timing (the second hold table after the starting prize) (The timing at which the shift is performed or an arbitrary timing), the hold display can be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed (the effect control microcomputer 100 produces the effect). A part for executing steps S1809, S1812, and S1832 of the symbol variation start process (FIGS. 41 to 43) and S1845 of the effect symbol variation process (FIG. 46) (see FIGS. 51 to 53); The hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the first special mode or the second timing at the first timing or the second timing at different ratios when the specific display result is determined and when the specific determination unit determines that the specific display result is not determined. 2 The display is changed to a special mode (the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the step of the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30)). Portions for performing the S67108, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to notice at which timing the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The invention according to the means 13 is as follows.
A game machine of the means 11 or means 12,
When the suspension display is displayed in the special mode, the restriction means for restricting the display of the suspension display in the special mode newly (the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the pre-reading effect determination processing (FIG. 28) at step S67101, (A part for executing S67117 and the like in the effect setting process (FIG. 30)).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, it is possible to prevent a player from being confused as to which attention to display when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode.

The invention according to the means 14 is as follows.
A gaming machine according to any one of means 11 to 13,
The effect executing means is, when the specific determination means determines that the specific display result is obtained, a higher percentage of the hold that has been determined by the specific determination means than when the specific determination means determines that the specific display result is not obtained. A hold announcement effect for displaying the hold display corresponding to the storage in the second special mode is executed (the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S67106 and S67114 of the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30), and the effect symbol change start process ( 43) and a part for executing S1845 and the like during the process of changing the effect symbol (FIG. 46)), and a hold announcement effect pattern for changing and displaying the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. When performing a hold announcement effect in the (second look-ahead effect pattern), the first effect (a suggestion effect in which a black arrow flies and sticks in the hold Pattern)) to change and display the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, and a second performance different from the first performance (when a white arrow flies) (Suggestion effect (success pattern) stuck in the hold display), and the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed, and the first effect is performed. The hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a different rate between the time when the second effect is performed and the time when the second effect is performed. Steps S67106 and S67110 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), S1832 of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 43), and S1845 of the effect symbol change process (FIG. 46).
A gaming machine characterized in that:
According to this means, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first effect and the second effect is performed, and it is possible to improve a game entertainment.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing the example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the example of a circuit structure of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a CPU on a main board. It is a flowchart which shows a 2ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the effect symbol prepared beforehand. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a winning-time determination result designation command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a hold buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the production control main processing which the production control CPU executes. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch effect determination process. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect execution determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a hold change effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a final display mode decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a prefetch effect pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect change timing determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows a background change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a double change effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table for double change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change timing determination table for double changes. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol of an effect symbol. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of hold | maintenance display and the aspect of a background. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold change effect based on a first look-ahead effect pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pending change effect based on a second look-ahead effect pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pending change effect based on a second look-ahead effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect of a hold change and a background change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect of a hold change and a background change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect of a hold change and a background change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect of a hold change and a background change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect of a hold change and a background change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect of a hold change and a background change. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching effect determination processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect design fluctuation stop processing in 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Embodiments of the present invention include the gaming machines according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as described below. Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described first, and then the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

[1. First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape and provided in a game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (game components to be described later). (Excluding the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing hitting balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure that includes a plate-like body constituting the board and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for effecting variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. The effect symbol display area has a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, The three areas of the display area may be separated from each other. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer (described later) mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  A first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6 on the upper left side. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers from 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be generically referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). 14), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of stored memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and , And the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time (variable time) elapses. Note that the prize means that the game ball has entered an area, such as a winning opening, which is determined in advance as a prize area. Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the first start port switch 13a.

  Below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can enter the second starting winning port 14 (the starting winning is easily performed), and the state becomes advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the open state, a game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win the second starting winning port 14, but it is possible to win (that is, the gaming ball receives the second starting winning). (It is difficult for the mouth 14 to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning port 14 is provided. A configuration in which a variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the starting winning ports 14 may be provided.

  When the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state, a game ball heading for the variable prize ball device 15 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9. However, the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening 13 is provided. 13 and the arrangement of nails around the first starting winning opening 13 makes it difficult for the game balls to be guided to the first starting winning opening 13, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is reduced. May be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

  In the lower part of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as a starting memory or a starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a including two displays (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one. For example, this is realized by executing a process of performing display control in a display control process (step S22) of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Below the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold consisting of four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second number of stored memories. A storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one. For example, this is realized by executing a process of performing display control in a display control process (step S22) of a timer interrupt process described later.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number (the total pending storage number) that is the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is provided. ing. In this embodiment, on the combined hold storage display section 18c, the hold displays corresponding to the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. You. In addition, in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold memory or the second hold memory may be displayed in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red). , The second hold storage may be displayed in blue). Further, instead of the combined reserved storage display unit 18c, a configuration may be adopted in which a first reserved storage display unit for displaying the first reserved storage number and a second reserved storage display unit for displaying the second reserved storage number are provided. Good.

  During the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 is used for decoration (effect). The effect design is displayed variably as the design for ()). The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start and end times of the variable display are substantially the same (or may be completely the same), and the variable display period is substantially the same (or may be completely the same). Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the user of the big hit. Is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 is provided. The ordinary symbol display device 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “O” and “X”) called ordinary symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting left and right lamps (symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) included in the symbol display 10, and for example, a lower lamp at the end of the variable display. If is lit, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is such that when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the player is in a state that is advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning port 14). Changes to In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32 is provided. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lighted displays by one. Then, each time the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started, the number of the lighted indicators is reduced by one. Furthermore, in the probable change state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than in the normal state, the probability that the stop symbol in the ordinary symbol indicator 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball device 15 The opening time is lengthened and the number of times of opening is increased. In other words, the high ball state, which is a game state controlled so that the game ball can be easily started and won (that is, the execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily satisfied). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened and the number of times of opening is increased even in a time saving state (a gaming state in which the variable display time of a special symbol is shortened).

  Note that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display device 10 shifts to the ordinary symbol probable state in which the probability that the stopped symbol hits the symbol is increased. This may cause a transition to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probable state, the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 hits the symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened is increased. Therefore, if the state is shifted to the normal symbol change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which starting winning is easy (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a positively varying symbol, and the like, which is disadvantageous for the player. To an advantageous state (a state in which the starting winning is easy). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that also includes changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is shortened, the normal symbol may be shifted to the high base state. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of the normal symbol hitting increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 opening increases, and the winning prize ball device 15 is in a state (high base state) where it is easy to win.

  In addition, by shifting to the time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is reduced, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so that an effective start winning is easily generated. The possibility of a jackpot game being played increases.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all of the above-mentioned states (open extended state, ordinary symbol positive change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (to shift to the high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extended state, ordinary symbol change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (high base State).

  At the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 which are blinkingly displayed during the game, and at the bottom there is an out opening 26 for taking in a hit ball which has not won. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the right and left upper sides outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the upper outer periphery, the left outer periphery, and the right outer periphery of the game area 7, respectively. In addition, near the left frame LED 28b, a prize ball LED 51 that is lit when there is a remaining prize ball is provided, and near the right frame LED 28c, a ball out LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball runs out is provided. . The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of a luminous body for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in addition to the various effects (decorative) LEDs described above, LEDs and lamps for effects are provided.

  The gaming machine has a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and thereafter descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the start is started). The condition is satisfied), the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning port 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least the RAM 56 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, and hence the following description means that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is when the numerical data is read (extracted), the read numerical data has a random number generation function that becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a function of selecting and setting an update range of numerical data (a function of selecting and setting an initial value and a function of selecting and setting an upper limit), a function of selecting and setting a rule for updating numerical data, and a method of selecting a rule for updating numerical data. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560 with a different numerical value) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the numerical data as the random R from the random number circuit 503 when the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a receives a start winning, and starts the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol. Sometimes, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the game state is shifted to a big hit game state as a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the capacitor as the backup power supply). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the total pending storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of outstanding payout balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by a power supply.

  A reset signal from a power supply board is input to a reset terminal (not shown) of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit that generates a reset signal to be supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal goes high, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like enter an operable state, and when the reset signal goes low the game control microcomputer 560 and the like enter an operation stop state. Therefore, during the period when the reset signal is at the high level, an allowance signal allowing the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is output, and during the period when the reset signal is at the low level, the game control microcomputer This means that the operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 560 is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric components is mounted).

  Further, an input port of the game control microcomputer 560 receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value. That is, the power supply board monitors a voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). Power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that the power-off signal is detected. Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to an input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that supplies detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming a special winning opening in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560 for game control. 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control with the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbols is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, microcomputers are not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70, but microcomputers may be mounted on each of them. Further, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

  The effect control board 80 carries an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. Note that the RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal (from the main board 31) input via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). The effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit, a part of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power), a part of the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided. The contents are saved. In particular, at least data indicating the gaming state (probable change state flags and time saving state flags, which will be described later) are stored in the backup RAM. However, in this embodiment, the value of the after-hours counter for counting the number of changes after the shift to the after-hours saving state described later is not stored in the backup RAM.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing in advance character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure or a symbol (including an effect design). Effect control CPU 101 outputs data read from the character ROM to VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal input from the main board 31 via the relay board 77 are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 77 serves as a signal direction restricting means for passing a signal input from the main board 31 only in a direction toward the effect control board 80 (not passing a signal in a direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, so that the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. The effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. In addition, a drive signal is supplied to the decorative LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitting body other than the LED is provided, a driving circuit (driver) for driving the light emitting body is mounted on the lamp driver board 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 reads out control data from the voice data ROM according to the sound number data, generates a voice or a sound effect, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs to the speakers 27R and 27L audio signals obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706. The sound data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a group of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined time period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in a time-series manner.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of a reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process from step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After the initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether or not data protection processing (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, the initialization processing executed at the time of turning on the power other than the recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 returns the game state restoring process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The part that must not be initialized includes, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer). ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command as an initialization command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S43). Then, control goes to a step S14. In this embodiment, in the process of step S43, the CPU 56 also transmits to the effect control board 80 a total pending storage number designation command in which the value of the total pending storage number counter stored in the backup RAM is set. .

  In this embodiment, whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored is confirmed using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, one of the backup flag and the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag, is initialized. The value is set.

  The CPU 56 also issues an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing) for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs an initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R, for example, by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (Steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (Step S17) and the initial value random number update process (Step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when a big hit is not performed or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not performed. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating an initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a symbol. It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display device, variable winning ball device, ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for determining whether or not a symbol has been hit is usually one round (in the process of transmitting a command signal for controlling another microcomputer, or the process of controlling the gaming machine). (Step by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of possible values)), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect by a lottery using random numbers. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually controls the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interruption process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not the power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, upon detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the states of the signals are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a, a second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). The first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the ordinary symbol display 10 output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, in response to the detection of a winning based on the turning-on of one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23, the payout control microcircuit mounted on the payout control board 37. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 according to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing a special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32). For example, if the start flag set in the special symbol process processing is set and the end flag is set, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 second, every 0.2 seconds elapses Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the first special symbol display in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b and The variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the ordinary symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in the output buffer for setting the ordinary symbol display control data according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“O” and “X”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag relating to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set. At such a speed, the display control data value set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “「 ”and 0 indicating“ x ”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10.

  Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control processing corresponds to the processing of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt processing. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed in the main process. May be executed.

  When the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Without reaching the reach state, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally non-reachable”) variable display mode when the variable display result is a lost symbol.

  When the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not ultimately become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lost”) when the variable display result is “losed”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Then, the effect symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the effect display device 9.

  When the small hit "5" is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 is "Suddenly probable big hit". After the effect symbols are variably displayed in the same manner as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probable variable big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol “5” on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small hit is a hit which is permitted up to a smaller number of times of opening of the special winning opening compared to the big hit (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second). Note that when the small hitting game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probable state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probable state. Further, the sudden change big hit means that the number of times the big winning opening is released is allowed to be small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening of 0.1 seconds is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short big hit and a big hit that shifts the game state after the big hit game to the positive change state (that is, by doing so, the player suddenly appears to be in the positive change state) Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By performing such control, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 second, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so that the player has a high probability state. (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the shortened non-reach loss and the non-reach loss are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol does not involve the reach state. Is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol involves a reach state, a normal out, a pseudo-run 1 normal out, a super run out, a pseudo run 2 super out, and a pseudo run Three supermarkets are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the pseudo run 1 normal deviation is used in the fluctuation pattern accompanying the effect of the pseudo run, the re-change is performed once. In addition, in the case of using the pseudo-run 2 super out of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using a pseudo-run 3 super out of the fluctuation patterns accompanying the effects of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed three times. In addition, the re-variation is to perform the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is once out of the range from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. . Further, among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 6, the shortened non-reach out-of-reach is a shortening fluctuation pattern provided for the non-reach out-of-reach and having a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach out-of-reach.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol is a normal big hit or a probable variable big hit, a normal hit, a pseudo consecutive 1 normal hit, a super hit, a pseudo hit There are two super-runs and three super-runs. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, in the case of using one pseudo-run per normal among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed once. In addition, in the case of using the pseudo-run 2 super hit among the fluctuation patterns accompanying the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using three super hits in the pseudo pattern among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo series, the re-change is performed three times.

  As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, a special hit is prepared as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol suddenly changes to a large hit or a small hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of the reach (for example, in the case of the super reach with the pseudo run (three times), The time is fixed at 40 seconds, and the fluctuation time is fixed at 25 seconds in the case of the super reach without the pseudo run.) For example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, The variation time may be made different depending on the number of reserved storages. For example, even in the case where the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storages increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when performing the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating time may be made different according to the first number of retained memories. When performing the fluctuation display of the 2 special symbols, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of reserved storages. In this case, a separate table is prepared for each of the values of the first storage number and the second storage number (for example, a variation pattern determination table for the storage numbers 0 to 2 and a variation pattern determination table for the storage numbers 3 and 4). A variation pattern determination table may be prepared in advance), and the determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number to vary the variation time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuating time is configured to be different between the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the game time is the time saving state (in the example shown in FIG. Is determined so that the rate of selection of “shortened non-reach out of range” having a shorter variation time than other variation patterns is higher), but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a normal state (or a time reduction state) However, the variation time may be configured to be different (that is, the rate at which the variation pattern having the shorter variation time is selected is different) depending on the total number of suspended storages. For example, the fluctuation time may be shortened (that is, the rate of selection of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is increased as the total number of suspended storages increases). In addition, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is made different (that is, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern with the short fluctuation time is selected is made different) in accordance with the first reserved storage number. Alternatively, in the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation time is made different (that is, the rate at which the variation pattern with the shorter variation time is selected is made different) in accordance with the second number of reserved storages. You may do so. In this case, a separate table is prepared for each of the values of the first storage number and the second storage number (for example, a variation pattern determination table for the storage numbers 0 to 2 and a variation pattern determination table for the storage numbers 3 and 4). A variation pattern determination table may be prepared in advance), and the determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number to vary the variation time.

  When a different variation pattern determination table is used according to the number of reserved storages, for example, the variation pattern determination table used when the display result is wrong and the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more is The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of reach (normal reach, super reach) becomes smaller as compared with the variation pattern determination table used when the number of storages is 0 to 2. In addition, the variation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is determined such that the ratio of “shortened non-reach outliers” having a shorter variation time than other variation patterns is increased. Is set. As a result, the average fluctuation time can be shortened as the total number of stored suspensions increases, and the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display decreases can be prevented as much as possible.

  Further, a specific effect (for example, super reach, ) Are assigned a common determination value (for example, 950 to 997). Therefore, irrespective of the total number of reserved storages (that is, even if the variation pattern determination table used is different), at the time of the start winning, if only the value of the extracted variation pattern determination random number (random 3) is confirmed, a specific effect (for example, (Super reach) can be easily determined in advance. Therefore, before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, it can be notified that a specific effect (for example, super reach) is accompanied (for example, an effect control command indicating the effect is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100). The effect is realized by executing an effect such as a pre-reading effect in the effect control microcomputer 100 that has transmitted and received the effect control command), thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, although the case where the assignment of the determination values is made different for the two types of the total number of pending storages of 0 to 2 or 3 or more is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the assignment may be made more finely and stepwise. In this case, for example, a variation pattern determination table for the total number of storages 0 and 1 and a variation pattern determination table for the total number 2 of storages, the total number of storages 3 and the total number of storages 4 May be prepared in advance, and the determination values may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanying the reach or the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation, and may be made to differ gradually.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probable variable jackpot, suddenly variable jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 3 (MR3): Determine fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for fluctuation pattern determination)
(3) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(4) Random 5 (MR5): Determine initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the variation pattern determination table using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3).

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the big hit type determination random number (random 1), the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3), and the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 3). The counter for generating the random number 4) is counted up (addition of 1). That is, these are the random numbers for determination, and the other random numbers are the random numbers for initial value (random 5). In addition, a random number other than the above-mentioned random number may be used in order to enhance the gaming effect. Also, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the big hit determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probable change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probable change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the big hit determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variation display of the second special symbol. (For second special symbol). Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and is set in FIG. 8C for the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are the small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number (random R) for jackpot determination. The random number value for jackpot determination is shown in FIG. If any one of the jackpot determination values is matched, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (a normal jackpot, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit described later). When the random number for big hit determination matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. Note that “probability” illustrated in FIG. 8A indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hitting game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “small hit” is higher.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8 (D) determines the type of the big hit using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed). It is a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a in the case. FIG. 8E shows a case where the big hit type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a big hit type determination table (for a second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b indicate that the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot" or "normal jackpot" based on the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to for determining one of “probably variable jackpot” and “suddenly variable jackpot”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, ten determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In contrast to this, three determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131b (ratio of 3/40). Will be suddenly determined as a jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first winning symbol 13 is started and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the second winning symbol 14 is started and the second special symbol is won. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio of being determined to be “suddenly variable jackpot” is higher. In addition, "sudden probability change big hit" is allocated only to the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden probability change big hit" is not allocated to the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (ie, Only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the "suddenly probable big hit" may be determined.) Note that the determination values set in the table are different in number and are not assigned redundantly.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and (E), the first specific game state in which a predetermined amount of game value is provided is two rounds of the sudden change big hit, which is larger than the game value. A case in which the 15th round jackpot (probably variable jackpot or normal jackpot) is determined as the second specific game state for giving the amount of game value will be described. 1 shows a case in which it is determined to be a specific game state, but the provided game value is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the special winning opening per round is increased as a game value is determined. Is also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, a second specific game state may be determined in which the opening time of the special winning opening per game during the big hit is extended as a game value. Further, for example, even in the same 15 rounds of big hits, a first specific game state in which the big winning opening is opened once per round and a second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened plural times per round are set. It may be prepared to increase the game value in the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds are opened). Is terminated, and in the case of the second specific game state, unfinished rounds remain), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to stimulate whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, all the 15 rounds have been internally completed, so the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, an uncompleted round remains internally. For this reason, the big hit game may be continued (an effect in which the opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after the big hit of opening 15 times is completed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and (E), the jackpot types include “normal jackpot”, “probably variable jackpot”, and “suddenly variable jackpot”.

  The term “probable jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and the state is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probable change state and The process proceeds to steps S170 and S171 described below. Then, after shifting to the probable change state, the probable change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  The “normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to the 15-bit jackpot game state and is not shifted to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game state, but is shifted only to the time saving state (see step S167 described later). . After the shift to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs before the execution of the predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display after the shift to the time reduction state, the time reduction state ends (see step S134 described later).

  The “suddenly variable jackpot” means that the number of times the large winning opening is released is smaller than that of “probably variable jackpot” or “normal jackpot” (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second are permitted). It is a big hit. In other words, when "suddenly changing probability big hit" is achieved, the state is controlled to the two round big hit gaming state. Then, in this embodiment, after the big round gaming state of the two rounds is completed, the state is shifted to the probable change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probable change state and also to the time saving state. Step S170 described later) , S171). Then, after shifting to the probable change state, the probable change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even when the "small hit" occurs, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by the "sudden probability change big hit" Similar control is performed. In the case of "small hit", the game state does not change and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained after the opening of the special winning opening has been completed twice (described later). Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a “suddenly changing big hit” or a “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and correspond to “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on random numbers (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to a jackpot type, a game state, and the like. is there. When the value of the extracted random 3 (1 to 997) matches the data (determination value) assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 56 changes the variation pattern to a pattern corresponding to the determination value of the matched variation pattern. decide. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the ratio of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern is shown. For example, when it is determined that the variable display result is “out” in the normal game state (“out” field in FIG. 9), the determination value corresponding to the value of random 3 (1 to 997) is determined. Of these, 50% are set in the fluctuation pattern “non-reach out of range”. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the values set in the fluctuation pattern determination table are as follows: the variable display result is "out", "out (time saving)", "normal big hit / probable change big hit" or "sudden positive change big hit / In the case of “small hit”, the ratio determined by the associated variation pattern is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9, for example, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is “outside” in the normal game state (“outside” field in FIG. 9), among the plurality of types of variation patterns, The rate of determination as "non-reach loss" is the highest, and the rate of determination as "pseudo consecutive 3 super loss" is the lowest. Also, for example, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is “out” in the time saving state (“outside (time saving)” field in FIG. 9), unlike the “outside” field, The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of “reach non-reach loss” is not determined and the ratio of “reduced non-reach loss” is increased. By setting in this manner, a change pattern with a short change time is easily selected in the time saving state.

  Further, when it is determined that the variable display result is “normal jackpot” or “probably variable jackpot” (the “normal jackpot / probably variable jackpot” field in FIG. 9), the change pattern of the pseudo continuous effect The determination value is assigned such that the ratio determined as “per pseudo 3 consecutive supermarkets” is the highest and the ratio determined as “per pseudo pseudo 1 normal” is lowest. In other words, in the “normal jackpot / probably variable jackpot” field, a variation pattern with a larger number of pseudo repetitions is likely to be selected from the variation patterns accompanied by the pseudo rendition. Therefore, in the pseudo consecutive production, the higher the number of pseudo consecutive productions, the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern with normal reach (normal out, pseudo-run 1 normal out, normal and per pseudo-run 1 normal) is a fluctuation pattern with super reach (super out, pseudo-run 2 super out). , The variable display result is more likely to be selected as "outside" than in the case of the pseudo-run 3 super-run, super-run, pseudo-run 2 super-run and pseudo-run 3 super-run. Conversely, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (super out, pseudo-run 2 super out, pseudo run 3 super out, super per, pseudo run 2 super per, and pseudo run 3 super per) is a fluctuation pattern with normal reach (normal out) , The pseudo run 1 normal deviation, the normal run and the pseudo run 1 normal run) are more likely to be selected when the variable display result is “normal big hit” or “probably variable big hit”. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with super reach has a higher expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit than the fluctuation pattern with normal reach.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9, when it is determined that the variable display result is “suddenly variable big hit” or “small hit” (“suddenly variable big hit / small hit” field in FIG. 9), The fluctuation pattern is determined to be “special hit”.

  10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. Note that “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100, when receiving the command 80XX (H), controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H).

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure restoration designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. When power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, otherwise, the initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning-time determination result designation command) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. In this embodiment, in a prize-winning effect process described later (see FIG. 16), the game control microcomputer 560 determines which variation pattern will be at the time of the start prize. Then, a value for specifying a fluctuation pattern as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the prize-winning-time determination result specification result command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the winning determination result designation command. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, a value is set in the EXT data in accordance with which variation pattern is determined at the time of the start winning, and a winning-time determination result designation command is transmitted. For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is “shortened non-reach loss” at the time of starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, a winning in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)” is set. An hour judgment result designation command is transmitted. Further, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern is “special hit” at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the winning set with “13 (H)” set in the EXT data. An hour judgment result designation command is transmitted.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). The big hit start specifying command includes a big hit start 1 specifying command, a big hit start specifying 2 specifying command, and a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start specifying command according to the type of big hit. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for designating the start of the probable change big hit when suddenly a big hit, but not to send the fanfare designation command when the small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command during opening of the special winning opening) indicating that the special winning opening is open at the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening at the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying a jackpot end screen, that is, for designating the end of the jackpot game and for designating a normal jackpot. is there. The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command) for displaying a jackpot end screen, that is, for designating the end of the jackpot game and designating that the jackpot has been a big hit. is there. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden change big hit game (small hit / sudden change probability big hit end command: Ending 3 designation command). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit the ending specification command for sudden change big hit end specification in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to transmit the ending specification command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (not including the probable change state). The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the probable change state.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved storage number designation command) for designating the first reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number designation command) for designating the second reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. I do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time a special winning symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b due to a winning start. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a two-byte configuration, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to “0”. Such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a process of fetching 1-byte data by an interrupt process.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The effect display can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and the effect is performed with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts such as the device 9, it is possible to prevent the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 from increasing.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a program for a special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 56 determines whether the first starting port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 is on or the gaming ball is in the second starting winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting the winning is on, that is, if the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 has a start winning, the start opening switch passing processing is performed. Is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first starting port switch 13a or the second starting port switch 14a is not on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processing in steps S300 to S310 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (the total reserved storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, a big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  Variation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, a fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) in the fluctuation pattern is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do so. Also, a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol change processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting processing elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. The value is updated to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, the control for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbols when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Big winning opening pre-processing (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. The execution time of the special winning opening process is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The pre-winning opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  Big winning opening processing (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, processing for confirming establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

  Big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) indicating a game state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the big winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. The execution time of the special winning opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. Note that the small hit pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the small hit pre-opening process is also a process of starting a small hit game.

  Small hit opening processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 (decimal number) in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for making the effect control microcomputer 100 perform display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in step S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first starting port switch 13a is on (step S1211). If the first starting port switch 13a is not on (N in step S1211), the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first startup port switch 13a is in the ON state (Y in step S1211), the CPU 56 determines whether the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, counts the first reserved storage number). (For example, whether the value of the first reserved storage number counter is 4) is checked (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit (Y in step S1212), the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (N in step S1212), the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1213), and adds the sum for counting the total reserved storage number. The value of the reserved storage number counter is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) for storing the order of winning into the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating "first" is set in the area (step S1215) (see FIG. 15A and the description of FIG. 15 described later).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts to win in the first starting winning port 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts to win in the second starting winning port 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating "first" when the first starting port switch 13a is turned on in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold hold specific area), When the second starting port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold hold specific area).

  FIG. 15A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). As shown in FIG. 15A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total pending storage counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 15A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 15 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total pending storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first winning entry 13 or Based on the winning in the second starting winning port 14, data indicating "first" or "second" in the winning order is set. Accordingly, the order of winning the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 15B) (see FIG. 15B). Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a random R (hard hit determination random number) as a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) as software random numbers are extracted, Stored in the storage area. The random number for random determination (random 3) is not extracted in the start-up switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and is stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the change of the first special symbol. You may. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 15 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (hard hit determination random number) as a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) as a software random number, and a variation. A random number for pattern determination (random 3) is stored. Note that the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-winning effect process in which a fluctuation display result or a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined at the time of the start winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the first reserved storage number counter, and thereafter, based on the determination result of the prize-winning production process, wins. Control for transmitting the time determination result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S1218).

  By executing the processing of step S1218, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether the state is the high probability state or the high base state, or the state of the big hit game), the CPU 56 Every time the first start winning opening 13 is started and a winning effect process is executed in S1217, both the first reserved memory number designation command and the winning time determination result designation command are always sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Send.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. However, a configuration may be adopted in which either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed with priority. For example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 in which the variable winning ball device 15 is provided, and it is easy to accumulate the second holding memory. The variable display may be executed with priority. In this case, the processing in step S1215 can be omitted, and the reserved storage specifying information storage area (reserved specific area) shown in FIG. Also, in this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first starting winning opening 13 has won a prize on condition that the game is not in the high base state (when the time reduction flag is not set) and the jackpot is not being played. An effect process (step S1217) may be performed. That is, when the condition is not satisfied, the execution of the prize-winning effect process (step S1217) is restricted, and the look-ahead effect (for details, see below) that the display result of the specific variable display is a big hit or a super reach. (Described later) may not be executed. In the configuration in which the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, in a game state in which the second start winning opening 14 is easily started and won, the change of the first special symbol based on the start winning in the first started winning opening 13 is performed. Since the display may continue to be postponed, there is a possibility that even if the pre-reading effect is executed, a state in which the variable display of the notice target is not easily executed may occur. However, by restricting the execution of the winning effect process (step S1217), it is possible to prevent the first starting winning port 13 from executing the prefetching effect based on the start winning, and such a state is avoided. be able to. In addition, by restricting the prize-winning effect processing during the high base state or the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state in which it is possible to recognize that the hold memory for the big hit is stored. Whether or not a big hit game is being performed is confirmed by, for example, a value of a special symbol process flag. In that case, the CPU 56 determines that the big hit game is being played when the value of the special symbol process flag is one of 5 to 7. Further, for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 always performs a winning effect process, and the effect controlling microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game is in a high base state and whether or not a big hit game is in progress. The execution of the look-ahead effect may be restricted.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second starting port switch 14a is on (Step S1222). If the second starting port switch 14a is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the number of second reserved storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the number of second reserved storages). It is checked whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1224), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total number of reserved storage counters in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) ( Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a random R (hard hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area. In addition, instead of extracting the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the starting opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and storing it in the storage area in advance, the random number is extracted at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the second reserved storage number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the second reserved storage number counter, and thereafter, based on the determination result of the prize-winning production process, wins. Control for transmitting the time determination result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S1229).

  By executing the process of step S1229, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether the state is the high probability state or the high base state, or the state of the big hit game), the CPU 56 Each time the second start winning port 14 is started and a winning effect process is executed in step S1228, both the second reserved storage number designation command and the winning time determination result designation command are always sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. To send.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning effect processing of steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect production process, the CPU 56 first compares the random number (random R) for jackpot determination extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value in the normal state shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in a special symbol normal process to be described later, a big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern setting process. Alternatively, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the prize-winning effect processing, it is confirmed in advance which variation pattern will be obtained. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern is predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect symbols is executed, and as described later, the jackpot or super Perform a look-ahead effect that gives a preview of reach.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability change state is set. Confirm (step S221). The probability change flag is set during a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability state by the gaming control microcomputer 560. If the probable change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the big hit determination value at the time of the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is determined whether or not matches (step S222). Note that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when it is determined in step S221 that the winning change is made at the start winning prize and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when it is determined in step S221 whether or not the winning change is made at the time of the start winning and the time when the change display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the start of the change). If the probability change jackpot has occurred before, the normal state has changed to the probability change state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of the change (see step S61 of the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 17) described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such inconsistency, it is also possible to specify a game with a change in the game state in the stored hold memory and determine the start winning based on the game state after the change. Good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of the probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with FIG. ) And (C) to determine whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case where the winning effect process (see step S1217) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 14), the CPU 56 proceeds to FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in (B). In addition, when there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 (when a winning effect process (see step S1228) is executed in the starting-port switch passing process shown in FIG. 14), the process proceeds to FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S224). In this embodiment, in step S224, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state (specifically, whether or not the time saving flag is set). Note that a plurality of variable displays are executed during a period from the confirmation of whether or not the variable state or the time saving state is established in step S224 at the time of the start winning, to the start of the variable display based on the start winning. May be For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when it is determined in step S224 whether or not the player is in the probability change state or the time saving state at the time of the start winning, and the time when the fluctuation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, However, if a certain-variable big hit occurs before the start of the change, the state changes from the normal state to the certain-state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the time of the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state determined at the start of the change (see step S61 described later).

  Then, the CPU 56 selects a field of the variation pattern determination table according to the determination result of step S224 (step S225). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the probable change state or the time reduction state, the CPU 56 selects the “missing (time reduction)” field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state, the "outside" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is selected.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 selects the "suddenly probable big hit / small hit" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. . (Step S226).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S227). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case where the winning effect process (see step S1217) is performed in the starting-port switch passing process shown in FIG. 14), the CPU 56 proceeds to FIG. Using the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in (D), it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probable big hit”. In addition, when there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 (when a winning effect process (see step S1228) is executed in the starting-port switch passing process shown in FIG. 14), FIG. Using the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden positive big hit”.

  Then, the CPU 56 selects a field of the variation pattern determination table according to the type of the big hit determined in step S227. (Step S228). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines “normal big hit” or “probable changing big hit”, the CPU 56 selects the “normal big hit / probable changing big hit” field of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If it is determined to be “suddenly large hit”, the “suddenly large hit / small hit” field of the fluctuation pattern determination table is selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern using the fields of the variation pattern determination table set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 (step S125). S229).

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the determined variation pattern in the winning-time determination result designation command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 wins one of the values “00 (H)” to “51 (H)” as shown in FIG. 12 according to which variation pattern is determined in step S229. A process for setting the EXT data of the time determination result designation command is performed.

  For example, when there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (when a winning effect process (see step S1217A) is executed in the starting-port switch passing process shown in FIG. 14), “non-reach” is performed in step S229. If it is determined that the variation pattern will be “outside”, a process of setting “02 (H)” to the EXT data of the prize-winning-time determination result designation command including the MODE data “95 (H)” is performed. If it is determined in step S229 that the variation pattern type is “pseudo consecutive 3 super hits”, the EXT data of the prize-winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “95 (H)” is “12 (H)”. ) "Is set.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the same variation pattern determination table even if the number of pending storages is different, but a different variation pattern determination table may be used according to the number of pending storages. . In this case, regardless of the number of retained memories, for example, it is determined from a random number for a variable pattern determination whether or not a variable pattern accompanies a normal reach, a super reach, or the like, and a prize-winning-time determination result designation command is issued based on the determination result. It may be transmitted, or when it is determined that a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern for performing a specific reach effect, a fluctuation pattern for a specific number of pseudo-repetitions, etc.) is obtained, and a prize indicating a determination result is obtained. The determination result designation command may be transmitted. Further, for example, it may be determined whether or not the display result is “normal big hit” or “probably variable big hit”, and a prize-winning-time determination result designation command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process (FIG. 13). In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storages (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is 0, the process ends.

  If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area (see FIG. 15A) is the data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating “first” (that is, the data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol pointer (No. Data indicating "second" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for one special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S54). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S53). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes according to the starting winning prize order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or change display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol change display or the second special symbol change display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although a case is shown, it may be configured such that either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed with priority. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, it is checked in step S52 whether the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number buffer is 1 or more. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S54, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S53.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (Step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines that each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. In the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one and sets the value in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved storage buffer are shifted. I do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage number in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the symbols stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Further, the CPU 56 sums the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of second reserved storages) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. In addition, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective summed pending storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the summed suspended storage number = 1 to 8.

  When the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by one in step S56, the first special symbol reserved storage display 18a based on the subtracted count value of the reserved storage number counter. Alternatively, control for changing the display of the second special symbol hold storage display 18b is also performed.

  Then, the CPU 56 saves the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then reduces the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (Step S59). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first starting winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol. Data is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out a random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the starting port switch passage process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of deciding to determine a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. In other words, it is a program for executing the processing of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  The big hit determination process is configured so that the probability of a big hit is higher when the game state is in the probable change state (high probability state) than when the game state is in the non-probable change state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. More specifically, a large-hit-judgment-judgment table (a table in the ROM 54 in which a numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A is set in the ROM 54) in which a large number of big-hit determination values are set in advance, A normal time big hit determination table (a table in the ROM 54 in which numerical values on the left side in FIG. 8A are set) that is set smaller than the big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is the probable change state. When the gaming state is the probable change state, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining a big hit using the probable change time big hit determination table, and the game state is normally set. When the player is in the gaming state or the time saving state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, to determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display is a big hit symbol. But also.

  It should be noted that whether or not the current gaming state is in the probable change state is determined by whether or not the probable change flag is set. The certainty change flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certainty change state, and is reset when the certainty change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be a probability change big hit or sudden change probability big hit, is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the special symbol change display is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Reset at the timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 checks the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine whether to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. . If it is determined that the small hit is made (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match any of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. Then, a big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used for determining the big hit type to be one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8E.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type (“normal jackpot”, “probable change”) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "suddenly changed big hit") is determined as the big hit type (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S214A of the first starting port switch passing process or step S214B of the second starting port switch passing process and stored in the first holding buffer or the second holding buffer in advance. Read the random number for use and determine the type of jackpot. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The probability that sudden change big hits are suddenly selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probable change jackpot”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, When the jackpot type is “suddenly changing big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a lost symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, and “7” is determined as the special symbol stop symbol according to the result of the determination of the big hit type. In other words, if the jackpot type is determined to be "Suddenly probable big hit", "1" is determined to be the special symbol stop symbol, and if it is determined to be "Normal big hit", "3" is determined to be the special symbol stop symbol. However, if it is determined to be "probable change big hit", "7" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)) (step S76).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process (FIG. 13). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S91). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the "normal big hit / probable big hit" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table if the big hit type is the normal big hit or the probable big hit (Y in step S92). If the big hit type is not the normal big hit or the probable big hit (N in step S92), the “suddenly big hit / small hit” field of the fluctuation pattern determination table is selected (step S94). Then, control goes to a step S101.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the “suddenly variable big hit / small hit” field in the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S96). Then, control goes to a step S101.

  If the small hit flag has not been set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time saving flag indicating that it is in the time saving state has been set (step S97). The time reduction flag is set when the game state is shifted to the time reduction state (including when the game state is shifted to the probable change state), and reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot, and is set in a process of ending the jackpot game, and the timing of reducing the number of time savings and the change of the special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot It is reset at the timing when the display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "missing (time reduction)" field in the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S98). Then, control goes to a step S101.

  If the time reduction flag has not been set (N in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "missing" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S99). Then, control goes to a step S101.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) from the random number buffer area (the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer) (step S101), and performs the processing of step S93, S94, S96, S98 or S99. The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the field of the variation pattern determination table selected in (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (a fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol change designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Also, the change of the special symbol is started (step S105). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S106). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)) (step S107).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits any one of display result 1 to display result 5 designation effect control commands (see FIG. 10) in accordance with the determined type of big hit, small hit, or missing. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process moves to step S116. If the big hit flag is set and the big hit type is the probable big hit, control is performed to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). It is to be noted that whether or not the big hit is a big hit can be determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. Further, when the type of the big hit is the sudden change big hit, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be determined whether or not it is a sudden change big hit, specifically, by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. Then, when it is neither the probable jackpot nor the sudden probable jackpot (that is, when it is a normal jackpot), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). If the small hit flag has not been set (N in step S116), that is, if the small hit has occurred, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)) (step S119).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process (FIG. 13). In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol stop process (special symbol process process ( The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S304) in FIG. 13) (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process (FIG. 13). In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S32 to end the change of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and "second" is indicated on the special symbol pointer. If the data is set, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a design confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process shifts to step S140 (step S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating that it is in the probable change state and the time reduction flag indicating that it is in the time saving state if it is set (step S134), and effects control Control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is the normal big hit, the big hit start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is the probable big hit, a big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is sudden change big hit, a small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the type of the big hit is the normal big hit, the probable big hit or the sudden big hit is determined based on the big hit type data stored in the RAM 55 (the data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S136).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying the effect display device 9 that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S137). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit or a probable change big hit, and 2 times in the case of a sudden change big hit) is set in the big win opening counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening pre-processing (step S305 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)) (step S139).

  In step S140, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not a probable change flag indicating a probable change state is set. If the probable change flag has not been set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time saving flag indicating that it is in the time saving state has been set (step S141). If the time reduction flag is set (that is, if control is performed only in the time reduction state without a probability change state), the value of the time reduction number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is set to − 1 (step S142).

  Next, when the value of the time saving counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time saving flag (step S145). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag has been set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly variable probability big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time in which the occurrence of the small hit is notified in the effect display device 9, for example) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S149). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, two times) is set in the special winning opening number counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-small hit start process (step S308 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)). (Step S152).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process (FIG. 13). In the big hit end processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step S160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 56 shifts to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, if it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted, if it is a probability variable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted, and if it is a sudden variation big hit, a small hit / sudden Send the command to specify the end of the jackpot. Then, a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to a time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process ends.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the type of the big hit is a probable big hit or a sudden big hit (step S166). It is to be noted that whether or not a jackpot or a sudden jackpot is determined by whether the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02” to “03”. It can be determined by checking. If it is neither the probable jackpot nor the sudden probable jackpot (that is, the normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time saving number counter for counting the number of time savings (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the time reduction state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S169). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  If it is a probability change hit or sudden change probability hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S171). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the probable change state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S172). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  In this embodiment, the time-saving flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not the opening time of the variable prize ball device 15 is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process process (see step S27 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 5)), the time reduction flag is set when the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. It is confirmed whether or not the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened by increasing the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening if it is set. The time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol is reduced.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300 of the special symbol process process (FIG. 13)) (step S173).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main process. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining an activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, effect control CPU 101 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, first, effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (step S706). After that, the procedure moves to step S702.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six effect control commands having a 2-byte configuration is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It is not always necessary to use the ring buffer format.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 10 and 11) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  FIGS. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S704 of the effect control main (FIG. 24)). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, first, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (Y in step S611), the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (see FIG. 25) (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time. If the reception command is not stored in the command reception buffer (N in step S611), the effect control CPU 101 ends the command analysis processing.

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (Y in step S621), effect control CPU 101 stores the fluctuation pattern command in a fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S622). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S623).

  If the received effect control command is not a variation pattern command (N in step S621), but is a display result designation command (Y in step S625), the effect control CPU 101 returns the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command).コ マ ン ド display result 5 designation command) is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is not a display result specifying command (N in step S625), but is a symbol fixing specifying command (Y in step S627), effect controlling CPU 101 sets a fixing command receiving flag (step S628). .

  If the received effect control command is not the symbol confirmation designation command (N in step S627) but the first reserved storage number designation command (Y in step S651), the production control CPU 101 executes the first reserved storage number designation command. The second byte of data (EXT data) is stored in the first reserved storage number storage area as the first reserved storage number (step S652).

  If the received production control command is not the first reserved storage number designation command (N in step 651) but the second reserved storage number designation command (Y in step S654), the production control CPU 101 sets the second reserved storage number. The second byte data (EXT data) of the number designation command is stored in the second reserved storage number storage area as the second reserved storage number (step S655).

  Next, if the received effect control command is not the second reserved storage number designation command (N in step S654), but is any of the prize determination result designation commands (Y in step S664 in FIG. 27), the effect control CPU 101 Saves the received prize-time determination result designation command (see FIG. 12) in the prize-time command storage area (FIG. 27A to be described later) in the area associated with the total number of reserved storages (step S665), An effect determination process is performed (step S671).

  In this embodiment, the total number of reserved storages is the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area and the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area. Is obtained by adding The first reserved storage count is updated in step S652 after receiving the first reserved storage designation command, and the second reserved storage count is updated in step S655 after receiving the second reserved storage designation command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. Also, the winning determination result specifying command is transmitted after transmitting the first reserved storage number specifying command in step S1218 of the starting port switch passing process, and in step S1228, transmitting the second reserved storage number specifying command. Sent later. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the prize-winning-time determination result designation command after updating the total number of pending storages. In the process of step S665, the effect control CPU 101 sets the prize-winning-time determination result designation command in a storage area associated with the total number of reserved storages in the prize-winning command storage area. Then, the winning determination result is specified by the second byte data (EXT data) of the stored winning determination result specifying command (see FIG. 12). Also, the data set in the winning command storage area is deleted in order from the one that was set first in the effect symbol change start processing (see FIG. 41, the timing at which the processing of step S1800 is executed) described later. .

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a prize-winning command storage area that is an area for storing a prize-winning-time determination result designation command. As shown in FIG. 27A, in this embodiment, the prize-time command storage area has eight storage areas associated with the total number of pending storages in the prize-time command storage area. In addition, in the case where the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed, in order to distinguish which of the winning determination results, A first prize command storage area for storing a prize determination result at the time of a start prize to the first start prize port 13, and a second prize for storing a prize determination result at the time of a start prize to the second start prize port 14 A time command storage area and a prize winning command storage area may be prepared. In this case, in the first winning command storage area, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured. In the second winning command storage area, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. Also, in this case, the first winning command storage area and the second winning command storage area store the winnings received at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening and at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening, respectively. The time determination result designation command is stored. The winning command storage area (first winning command storage area and second winning command storage area) is formed in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S683). Then, control goes to a step S611 (FIG. 26).

  Next, a prefetching effect will be described. The look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variable display to be directed, and the variable display to be directed is a big hit or a specific change (for example, including a reach effect). It is a notice production that gives a notice. In this embodiment, as a pre-reading effect, (1) in the combined suspension storage display unit 18c, a suspension display corresponding to a variable display (suspension storage) to be notified is displayed in a normal display mode (hereinafter, referred to as a normal mode). There is a hold change effect displayed in a display mode (a special mode described later with reference to FIG. 50, or a first special mode or a second special mode), and (2) an effect displayed on the effect display device 9. There is a background change effect in which the display mode of the pattern background image is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (a first background mode or a second background mode described later with reference to FIG. 50). In the following description, the look-ahead effect may be referred to as “announcement effect”.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect determination process (the process of step S671 of the command analysis process (FIGS. 26 to 27)). In the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether a hold change flag or a background change flag is set (step S67101). If either the hold change flag or the background change flag is set (Y in step S67101), the effect control CPU 101 sums and holds a new hold display corresponding to the (latest) start winning prize to be processed. It is displayed on the storage display unit 18c in a normal mode (step S67105g). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls the sixth hold display to be displayed in a normal mode. . Then, the effect control CPU 101 ends the prefetch effect determination process.

  Here, when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed, the hold change flag is set to step S67117 of the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30 described later) or step S67312 of the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36). Set by When the background change effect is determined to be executed, the background change flag is set in step S67217 of the background change effect setting process (FIG. 35 described later) or step S67307 of the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36). Set. The hold change flag and the background change flag that are set here are reset in steps S854b and S854c of the effect symbol change stop process (FIG. 47 described later) for the change display (hold storage) serving as the target of the prefetch effect. In other words, in step S67101, the effect control CPU 101 confirms that the hold change flag or the background change flag is set, so that the hold change effect or the background change effect, which is a look-ahead effect, is stored in the hold memory at this time. Make sure that any pending memories that are to perform any of the change effects are not included.

  In this manner, in this embodiment, it is determined that a new hold change effect is to be executed after the change display that is the target of the hold change effect is completed after the execution of the hold change effect is determined. And a new background change effect is not determined. That is, from the time when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed to the time when the change display serving as the target of the hold change effect ends, the hold change is performed with the change display (hold memory) different from the target of the hold change effect as the target. It is not decided to execute the effect and the background change effect. In addition, from when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed to when the change display that is the target of the background change effect ends, it is not determined to newly execute the hold change effect, and a new background change effect is performed. It is restricted so that it is not decided to execute. That is, from the time when the execution of the background change effect is determined to the time when the change display serving as the target of the background change effect ends, the change display (holding storage) that is different from the target of the background change effect is performed. It is not decided to execute the effect and the background change effect. If neither the hold change effect nor the background change effect, which is the look-ahead effect, is to be executed, as described below, the hold memory corresponding to the latest start winning (the corresponding hold memory) For the variable display, whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and in the case of executing a pre-reading effect, a process of determining an effect type (either or both of a pending change effect and a background change effect) is executed. .

  If neither the hold change flag nor the background change flag has been set (N in step S67101), effect control CPU 101 stores the winning command storage area (see FIG. 27A). All the prize-winning-judgment-result designation commands before (past) the target (latest) start prize are extracted (step S67102). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not all of the extracted prize-winning-time determination result designation commands are commands indicating “non-reach” (step S67103). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S67103 that all of the extracted prize-winning-time determination result designation commands indicate that the variation pattern is “shortened non-reach loss” or “non-reach loss”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the prize determination result 1 is specified or the prize determination result 2 is specified (refer to FIG. 12) (that is, it is confirmed whether or not a change display of a loss without a reach is performed). ). If at least one or more of the extracted prize-winning-time determination result designation commands does not indicate “non-reach” (N in step 67103), a new hold display corresponding to the (latest) start prize to be processed is performed. Is displayed in the normal mode on the summed storage display unit 18c (step S67105g), and the prefetching effect determination process ends.

  That is, in steps S67102 and S67103, among the prize-winning determination result designation commands stored in the start-time command storage area, the prize-winning determination result designation command preceding (latest) to the (latest) start winning prize of the process concerned. In the case where a variable display accompanied by a reach effect is included, a process for not performing both the hold change effect and the background change effect is performed on the variable display of the process. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, when there is a hold memory in which the variable display accompanied by the reach effect is performed, the prefetch effect is not executed based on the newly received prize-time determination result designation command. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when there is a hold memory in which a fluctuation display accompanied by a reach effect is performed, a prefetch effect is executed based on the newly received prize-time determination result designation command. You may.

  If all the prize-winning-judgment-result designation commands extracted in step S67102 indicate “non-reach” (Y in step S67103), the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the (latest) start prize to be processed. Based on the prize-winning-time determination result designation command, referring to the look-ahead effect execution determination table (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and the effect type when the look-ahead effect is executed (step S67104). .

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing a look-ahead effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead effect execution determination table, the decision items (“execution of both the hold change effect and the background change effect (double change effect)”, “execution of the hold change effect only”, “only the background change effect) Although determination values corresponding to “execute” and “both effects are not performed” are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 29, for simplification of the description, the ratio of the assigned determination values is expressed as a percentage ( %). The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform a prefetch effect and a type of effect when performing the prefetch effect, and determines that a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned. Items ("Execution of both the pending change effect and the background change effect (double change effect)", "Execute only the pending change effect", "Execute only the background change effect", "Do not execute both effects") . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 31, “execution of both the hold change effect and the background change effect (double change effect)”, “execution of the hold change effect only”, and “only the background change effect” in each winning determination result. The numerical values corresponding to "Execute" and "Do not execute both effects" are determined as "Execute both pending change effect and background change effect (double change effect)", "Execute only hold change effect" "," Execute only background change effect ", and" Do not execute both effects "indicate the selection ratio (%). Here, in this embodiment, when both the hold change effect and the background change effect are performed for one hold memory (variable display), the hold change effect and the background change effect are collectively referred to. It may be called a double change effect.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 29, the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32, and the look-ahead effect change timing determination shown in FIG. In the table, the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, and the background mode determination table shown in FIG. 35 (A), actually, the determination values are assigned, but the determination values assigned for simplifying the explanation. The percentage of the value is indicated. In addition, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, S67115 (FIG. 30), and S67206 (FIG. 35), which will be described later, in which these tables are used, similarly to step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 performs, for example, final display. A random number for determining an aspect, a prefetching effect pattern, a change timing (the number of shifts), an effect mode of a suggestive effect, or a background mode is extracted, and the item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned is determined.

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 executes a prefetch effect at a rate determined for each prize-time determination result in the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 29 based on the extracted latest prize-time determination result designation command. Decide whether to do it. Here, the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 29A is used when the total number of pending storages is one, and the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 29B is two or more. There is a look-ahead effect execution determination table used in such a case.

  When the total number of stored storages is 1, that is, the total number of stored storages before the start prize is 0 and the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. When it is indicated that there is (the prize determination result 1 is specified to the prize determination result 7 is specified), the effect control CPU 101 decides to execute only the hold change effect at a rate of 15%, and 85%. It is determined that neither the pending change effect nor the background change effect is executed in proportion. When the result of the prize-winning determination indicates that "normal big hit / probably variable big hit" (the prize-winning determination result 8 is designated to the prize-winning determination result 12 is designated), the production control CPU 101 sets a 50% rate. It is decided to execute only the pending change effect, and not to execute any of the pending change effect and the background change effect at a rate of 50%. Further, when the prize-winning determination result indicates "sudden probability large hit / small hit" (winning-time determination result 13 is designated), the effect control CPU 101 executes only the hold change effect at a rate of 40%. It is decided not to execute any of the pending change effect and the background change effect at a rate of 60%.

  As described above, when the total number of stored reservations is 1, the background change effect is not executed, and only the hold change effect can be executed. This is because, when it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the background is changed from the variable display that is executed first after the start winning. That is, when the total number of reserved storages is 1, the variable display executed immediately thereafter is the target, so that the possibility of a big hit is announced by the background change effect before the target variable display is executed. This is because they cannot do it. On the other hand, in the hold change effect in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect at the time of the start winning, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the start winning in a special mode. (The case where the total number of pending storages of the first look-ahead effect pattern described later is 1), and the holding change effect can be executed even when the total number of pending storages is 1.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the background change effect at the time of the start winning, an example in which the background image is changed to the first background mode or the second background mode from the variable display to be executed next. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and when it is determined that the background change effect is to be performed at the time of the start winning, the background of the variable display being executed at the time of the starting winning is set to the first background mode or the second background mode. You may make it change to a background aspect. That is, the background change effect may be executable even when the total number of reserved storages is one.

  When the total number of pending storages is two or more, that is, when the total number of pending storages before the start prize is not 0 and the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. (The prize-winning determination result 1 is designated to the prize-winning determination result 7 is designated), the effect control CPU 101 outputs both the holding change effect and the background change effect at a rate of 4% (double effect). Change effect), to execute only the pending change effect at the rate of 10%, to execute only the background change effect at the rate of 1%, and to execute the effect at the rate of 85%. It is determined that neither the pending change effect nor the background change effect is performed. Further, when the prize-winning determination result indicates “normal jackpot / probably variable big hit” (the prize-winning judgment result 8 is specified to the prize-winning judgment result 12 is specified), the effect control CPU 101 sets the rate of 35%. Decided to execute both the pending change effect and the background change effect (double change effect), decided to execute only the pending change effect at a rate of 10%, and the background change effect at a rate of 5% It is decided to execute only the effect of the pending change effect and the background change effect at a rate of 50%. Further, when the prize-winning determination result indicates that “sudden probability change big hit / small hit” (win-time prize judgment result 13 is designated), the effect control CPU 101 sets the hold change effect and the background change at a rate of 25%. Decide to execute both effects (double change effect) of the effect, decide to execute only the pending change effect at a rate of 10%, and decide to execute only the background change effect at a rate of 5% It is determined that neither the pending change effect nor the background change effect is executed at a rate of 60%.

  What is characteristic in the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 29 is that the display result is “ In the case of “normal jackpot” or “probable change jackpot” (corresponding to the prize-winning judgment result 8 designation to the prize-judgment judgment result 12 designation), the ratio of the pre-reading effect (hold change effect or background change effect) is higher That is, the determination value is set so that With such a feature, the rate of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of the notice target can be increased when the prefetch effect is executed, compared to when the prefetch effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the execution of the prefetching effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 29, it is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect for each display result ("outside", "normal big hit / probable change big hit", "sudden probable change big hit / small hit") indicated by the prize-winning-judgment result designation command. And a determination value (ratio) for determining an effect type when executing a pre-reading effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a fluctuation pattern indicated by a prize-winning-judgment-result designation command. A determination value (ratio) for determining whether or not to perform the prefetching effect and the type of effect when performing the prefetching effect may be set. For example, even if the display result is the same "out of reach", in the case of "out of reach" or "out of super reach", the look-ahead effect (pending change effect or background change Effect may be executed, and even if the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by the same reach, a reach effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, a super reach effect) is performed, and a reach effect with a low degree of expectation (for example, The look-ahead effect (pending change effect or background change effect) may be executed at a higher rate than when the normal reach effect is performed. Further, when the winning determination result designation command indicates “non-reach loss” (“short non-reach loss” or “non-reach loss”), it may not be determined to execute the pre-reading effect.

  In the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 29, when it is possible to determine that the background change effect is to be executed (when the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more), the ratio determined to execute the background change effect is 5/100 for "outside", 40/100 for "normal jackpot / probable jackpot", and 30/100 for "sudden jackpot / small jackpot", the double change effect (pending change effect and background) The ratio determined to execute (change effect) is 4/100 for “outside”, 35/100 for “normal big hit / probable big hit”, and 25/100 for “sudden probable big hit / small hit”. . Also, the ratios determined to execute only the pending change effects are 10/100 for “outside”, 10/100 for “normal big hit / probable change big hit”, and 10/100 for “sudden probable change big hit / small hit”. Has become.

  Here, in the case of “outside”, [the ratio of executing the hold change effect when executing the background change effect] = 4/5 is set higher than [the ratio of executing only the hold change effect] = 10/100. Have been. Further, in the case of “normal jackpot / probable change jackpot”, [the ratio of executing the hold change effect when executing the background change effect] = 35/40 is from [the ratio of executing only the hold change effect] = 10/100. Is also set high. Further, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit / small hit", [the ratio of executing the hold change effect when executing the background change effect] = 25/30 is [the ratio of executing only the hold change effect] = 10/100. It is set higher than.

  Here, in the case of “outside”, [the ratio at which the hold change effect is executed when the background change effect is executed] = 4/5 is [the ratio at which the hold change effect is not executed when the background change effect is executed] = It is set higher than 1/5. In addition, in the case of “normal jackpot / probable change jackpot”, “Ratio of executing hold change effect when executing background change effect” = 35/40 means “do not execute hold change effect when executing background change effect. Ratio] = 5/40. In the case of “sudden probability change big hit / small hit”, [the ratio of executing the hold change effect when executing the background change effect] = 25/30 means that the hold change effect is executed when the background change effect is executed. Ratio] = 5/30.

  In this embodiment, in the case where one of the hold change effect and the background change effect is executed for one hold storage (variable display), first, as shown in FIG. After the image changes to the first background mode or the second background mode, the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the hold change effect, is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode. If the display mode of the hold display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode, that is, in a state where the hold memory (variable display) to be the target of the notice effect can be recognized, the background mode is changed to the first mode. Even if the background mode or the second background mode has been changed, the target of the background change effect is apparent to the player (it is recognized as a hold memory (variable display) corresponding to the hold display of the special mode). The characteristics of the background change effect are impaired, and it is not possible to enhance the interest by executing both the notice effects. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the background change effect in which it is difficult to recognize the hold storage (variable display) to be the target of the advance notice effect is executed, so that the player first determines which hold storage (variable display). ) Is interested in whether it is the target of the announcement effect, and then a hold change effect that can recognize the hold memory (variable display) as the target of the advance effect is executed (ie, the object of the advance effect is indicated). By doing so, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest without deteriorating the characteristics of both of the preview effects.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the background change effect is executed for one hold storage (variable display), the rate at which the hold change effect is executed is for one hold storage (variable display). By setting higher than the rate at which the pending change effect is executed when the background change effect is not executed, the interest caused by the execution of both the notice effect of the hold change effect and the background change effect is appropriate. Can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the background change effect is executed for one hold storage (variable display), the rate at which the hold change effect is executed depends on the one hold storage (variable display). When the change effect is executed, the change effect is set to be higher than the ratio at which the hold change effect is not executed, thereby appropriately improving the interest caused by the execution of the notice effect of both the hold change effect and the background change effect. Can be.

  After step S67104, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute a prefetch effect (step S67105). If it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect (Y in step S67105), that is, if it is determined to execute one or both of the hold change effect and the background change effect (double change effect), the process proceeds to step S67105. The process moves to S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the look-ahead effect (N in step S67105), that is, when it is determined not to execute any of the hold change effect and the background change effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total hold effect. The storage display unit 18c displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in a normal mode (step S67105g).

  In step S67105a, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total number of suspended storages in the effect total pending storage number counter for specifying the suspension display to be the target of the prefetch effect (step S67105a). The value of the effect total storage number counter for effect is decremented by 1 in steps S1804, S1814, or S1821 of the effect symbol change start process (FIGS. 41 and 42) described later, and is subjected to a prefetch effect in steps S1812 and S1829. Used to identify the pending display. For example, when a hold change effect is executed as a pre-reading effect, if the value of the effect total hold storage number counter is 4, a hold for changing the display mode of the fourth hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is performed. A change effect is performed. In this embodiment, the total number of reserved storages is the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area and the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area. Is obtained by adding The first reserved storage number is updated in step S652 of the command analysis process (FIG. 26) after receiving the first reserved storage number designation command, and the second reserved storage number is received the second reserved storage number designation command. Later, since it is updated in step S655 of the command analysis process (FIG. 26), the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. In addition, the prize-winning-time determination result designation command is transmitted after transmitting the first reserved storage number designation command in step S1218 of the startup opening switch passage processing (FIG. 14), and in step S1229, the second reserved storage number designation command is transmitted. Sent after sending a command. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the prize-winning-time determination result designation command after updating the total number of pending storages.

  After step S67105a, the effect control CPU 101 performs both the effect of the hold change effect and the effect of the background change (double effect) for the change display (hold memory) corresponding to the new start winning in the above processing. It is determined whether or not execution is to be performed (step S67105b). If it is not determined to execute both the holding change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) (N in step S67105b), effect control CPU 101 determines to execute only the holding change effect. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (step S67105c). If it is determined that only the pending change effect is to be executed (Y in step S67105c), the effect control CPU 101 executes a later-described change effect presentation setting process shown in FIG. 30 (step S67105d). If it is not determined that only the pending change effect is to be executed (N in step S67105c), the effect control CPU 101 determines that only the background change effect is to be executed. An effect setting process is executed (step S67105e). Then, a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage is displayed in the normal mode in the combined hold storage display unit 18c (step S67105g). Further, in the above-described step S67105b, when it is determined that both the holding change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) are to be executed (Y in step S67105b), the effect control CPU 101 A double change effect setting process shown in FIG. 36 to be described later is executed (step S67105f). Then, a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage is displayed in the normal mode in the combined hold storage display unit 18c (step S67105g).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pending change effect setting process (the process of step S67105d of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28)). In the hold change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first displays a hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage (a hold display corresponding to a variable display (hold storage) to be notified) in any display mode. It is determined whether to display (Step S67106). In this embodiment, a special mode, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided as the display mode of the hold display in addition to the normal mode. However, as described later, the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode during the period until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. Is displayed. In this step S67106, effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be either the first special mode or the second special mode, and determines whether or not to display in the special mode before changing to the final display mode. Is determined in a process to be described later (process of determining a prefetching effect pattern in step S67107). In the following description, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as special modes.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing the final display mode determination table. In step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 determines in what display mode the hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage is finally displayed using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 31 (hereinafter, the final display mode). Also called). Specifically, based on the extracted latest prize-time determination result designation command, the final display mode is changed at a rate determined for each variable display display result indicated by the prize-time determination result designation command in the final display mode determination table. decide. For example, when the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command indicates “outside” (corresponding to the prize-winning-judgment result 1 to the prize-winning-judgment result 7), the effect control is performed. The CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 80%, and determines the final display mode as the second special mode at a rate of 20%. Further, for example, when the prize-winning determination result indicates that the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probably variable big hit” (corresponding to a prize-winning judgment result of 8 to a prize-winning judgment result of 12) In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the final display mode as the second special mode at a rate of 80%.

  The characteristic feature of the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 31 is that the display result is “compared to the case where the display result is“ out of place ”(corresponding to the designation of the prize judgment result 1 to the prize judgment result 7). The determination value is set so that the ratio determined in the second special mode is higher in the case of "normal jackpot" or "probable change jackpot" (corresponding to the prize determination result of 8 to the prize determination result of 12). That is being done. With such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of the notice target is higher than when the hold display is displayed in the first special mode. can do. In other words, according to such a feature, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be increased when displayed in the second special mode than in the first special mode. The player can be interested in which display mode is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, the final result is displayed for each of the display results indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command ("out", "normal big hit" or "probable big hit", or "sudden probable big hit" or "small hit"). A determination value (ratio) for determining the display mode is set. For example, a determination value (ratio) for determining the final display mode is determined for each variation pattern indicated by the prize-winning determination result designation command. It may be set. By doing so, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to or instead of increasing the rate of occurrence of big hits in the variable display of the notice target, the reach with a high expectation is high. The rate at which the performance is performed can also be increased.

  In this embodiment, two types of display modes, a first special mode and a second special mode, are provided as final display modes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more display modes are provided. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected according to the display result may be different).

  When the final display mode of the hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage is determined by the processing of step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 next determines an effect pattern of the hold change effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a look-ahead effect pattern). (Step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first look-ahead effect pattern and a second look-ahead effect pattern are provided as the look-ahead effect patterns of the pending change effect. In the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold storage) of the notice target is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being once displayed in the special mode. Note that the first look-ahead effect pattern includes a change display (holding storage) corresponding to the notice target change display (hold storage) in the first special mode or the second special form at the timing of the start winning, and a change display of the notice target. A hold display corresponding to a variable display (hold storage) of a notice object is changed from a normal mode to a first special mode or a second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing until (hold storage) is started and displayed. And On the other hand, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, after the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target is once displayed in a special mode at the timing of the starting prize, an arbitrary display is displayed until the change display of the notice target is started. At the shift timing, the display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  The shift timing of the hold display means that the first hold display in the combined hold storage display section 18c is deleted and the remaining hold displays are shifted one by one in the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41) described later. This is the timing for updating the display of the total number of stored storages in the total storage display unit 18c (specifically, the timing at which step S1800 of the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 41) is executed). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing, and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed at the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed at the fourth is displayed at the third display area. The area is shifted to the area, and the hold display that has been displayed for the fifth time is shifted to the fourth display area.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a look-ahead effect pattern determination table. In step S67107, the effect control CPU 101 determines a prefetch effect pattern of the pending change effect based on the look-ahead effect pattern determination table and the total number of reserved memories. More specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result designation command (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably variable big hit”, “sudden probable big hit” or In the case of “small hit” (that is, when the prize-winning judgment result 8 is specified to the prize-winning judgment result 13 is specified), the hit-preceding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32A is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 converts the prefetching effect pattern into the first prefetching effect pattern and the second prefetching effect pattern at a rate determined for each of the total number of stored memories in the hit time prefetching effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. And decide on either.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is “outside” (that is, the prize-winning-judgment result 1 is designated to the prize-winning-judgment result 7 is designated). In this case, the prefetching effect pattern determination table at the time of a miss shown in FIG. 32 (B) is used. Then, effect control CPU 101 converts the prefetching effect pattern into the first prefetching effect pattern and the second prefetching effect pattern at a rate determined for each of the total number of retained memories in the out-of-time prefetching effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. And decide on either.

  For example, the display result of the variable display indicated by the prize-winning determination result is a hit (for example, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, “sudden positive big hit” or “small hit”), and the total number of stored storages is two. In some cases, the effect control CPU 101 determines the look-ahead effect pattern to be the first look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 35% and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 65%. Further, for example, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the prize-winning determination result is “outside” and the total number of storages to be held is two, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern to a ratio of 65%. Then, the second look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a rate of 35% for the first look-ahead effect pattern.

  A characteristic of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the display result of the variable display is a hit (for example, “normal big hit”, , "Suddenly variable big hit" or "small hit"), the determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the second look-ahead effect pattern is higher. By providing such a feature, when a hold change effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (that is, the hold display is temporarily displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then changed to a special mode and displayed). ), The change of the notice target is smaller than when the hold change effect is performed in the first look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is once displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode). The rate of occurrence of hits in the display can be increased. When the display result of the variable display is “normal jackpot” or “probable variable jackpot”, the rate of the final display mode being determined to be the second special mode is high, so the holding change effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern. When the hold is performed (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode at the time of the starting winning, and then changed to the special mode and displayed), the hold display displayed in the special mode is a bigger hit than the first special mode. Becomes higher in the second special mode having a high degree of expectation. Therefore, attention can be given to which look-ahead effect pattern the pending change effect is executed. Further, when the hold change effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (ie, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning), the hold display displayed in the special mode is more than the first special mode. Since it is easy to change to the second special mode having a high degree of expectation, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation and to improve a game interest. Also, in this embodiment, the hold display once displayed in the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display corresponding to the hold display (hold storage) is started. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained until the hold display is changed to the special mode after the hold display is displayed in the special mode.

  Also, what is characteristic in the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that, when the total number of reserved storages is 1, the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second look-ahead effect pattern. In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display once displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is displayed, Is an arbitrary shift timing until the start of the variable display. However, when the total number of storages to be held is 1 (that is, when only the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice object is displayed), if the shift of the hold display is performed once, the change display of the notice object is supported. The suspended display will be deleted. Therefore, when the total number of reserved storages is one, it is not possible to change the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at the shift timing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32, when the total number of reserved storages is 1, the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second look-ahead effect pattern.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, and In the look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice target is started. The timing is not limited to this, and another timing may be used. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during the variable display (a period spanning one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) executed before the variable display of the notice target is started. In this case, for example, even when the total number of held storages is 1, the second look-ahead effect pattern can be determined, and the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, corresponding to the hold display (hold storage). The display may be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, when the display result indicated by the prize-winning determination result is a hit (for example, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, “sudden positive big hit” or “small hit”), , The corresponding look-ahead effect pattern determination table is provided, for example, even if the display result is a hit, a case of "normal big hit" or "probable big hit", and "sudden probable big hit" or In the case of "small hit", a look-ahead effect pattern determination table may be provided to determine any of the look-ahead effect patterns at different rates. Further, for example, a look-ahead effect pattern determination table may be provided for determining any one of the look-ahead effect patterns at a different rate for each variation pattern indicated by the winning-time determination result designation command. By doing so, when the hold change effect is executed in the first look-ahead effect pattern, in addition to increasing the rate of occurrence of big hits in the variable display of the notice target, a reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed. The rate at which they are reported can be increased.

  After determining the pre-reading effect pattern (after step S67107 in the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30)), effect control CPU 101 changes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold storage) of the notice target. The change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) is determined, and the determined change timing (the number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (the number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold storage) of the notice target changes is a shift timing of an arbitrary hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the shift is performed with respect to the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target, at which timing the display mode is changed. For example, if the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the suspended display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed with respect to the suspended display corresponding to the variable display to be notified.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination table. In step S67108 described above, effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target based on the change timing determination table and the total number of hold storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives a display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result designation command (for example, “normal large hit”, “probably large hit”, “sudden positive big hit” or If the prefetching effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first prefetching effect pattern, the process proceeds to FIG. 33 (A). ) Is used. Then, effect control CPU 101 changes the suspension display corresponding to the fluctuating display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total suspension storage number in the hit first prefetching effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. The timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, the fact that the change timing (the number of shifts) is 0 means that the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning. When the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning prize, for example, the new hold display is realized by displaying the new hold display from the beginning in the first special mode or the second special mode. Alternatively, the new hold display may be realized by temporarily displaying the new hold display in the normal mode, and immediately after changing the display to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is “out”. If the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first look-ahead effect pattern, the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 33B is used. Then, effect control CPU 101 changes the suspension display corresponding to the notice display variable display at a rate determined for each total suspension storage number in the out-of-office first look-ahead production change timing determination table shown in FIG. The timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize-time determination result designation command (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably large hit”, “sudden positive big hit” or “small hit”. 33). In other words, if the prefetching effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second prefetching effect pattern, the result is shown in FIG. 33C. The hit second prefetch effect change timing determination table is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total suspended storage number in the hit second prefetching effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. The timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is “out”. If the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second look-ahead effect pattern, the out-of-sequence second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 33D is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total suspended memory number in the out-of-office second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. The timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  For example, when the hit first first look-ahead effect change timing determination table is used, if the total number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (the number of shifts) to 0 (winning) at a rate of 50%. ), The change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. Also, when the out-of-office first look-ahead effect change timing determination table is used, if the total number of retained memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (shift count) to 0 (winning) at a rate of 20%. ), The change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 50%.

  Further, for example, when the hit second second look-ahead effect change timing determination table is used, if the total number of retained memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (the number of shifts) to 1 at a rate of 30%. And the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the out-of-office second prefetching effect change timing determination table is used, if the total number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) to be 1 at a rate of 70%. Then, the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%.

  What is characteristic in the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the display result of the variable display is more successful in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern than in the case where the display result of the variable display is “out”. The determination value is set so that, for example, in the case of "normal big hit", "probable big hit", "sudden positive big hit" or "small hit", the rate of determining the change timing with a smaller number of shifts is higher. That is being done. By providing such a feature, when the hold change effect is performed in the first look-ahead effect pattern (ie, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode without being once displayed in the special mode), the hold is performed. When the display is changed from the normal mode to the special mode with a smaller number of shifts, the rate of occurrence of a hit in the variable display of the notice target can be increased, and the display is performed in the special mode at the time of the start winning (the number of shifts is 0). This can increase the rate of occurrence of hits. As a result, it is possible to give an interest to the timing at which the suspended display changes, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  Also, what is characteristic in the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the display result of the variable display is greater in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern than in the case where the display result of the variable display is “out”. Is a hit (for example, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, “sudden probable big hit” or “small hit”), the determination value is set so that the rate of determining the change timing with a larger number of shifts is higher. Is set. By having such a feature, when the hold change effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (ie, when the hold display is once displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then changed to the special mode), Is that when the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the special mode with a larger number of shifts (that is, after many shifts are performed), the rate of occurrence of a hit in the variable display of the notice target is increased. be able to. That is, as the period from when the hold display is displayed in the special mode to when the display is changed to the special mode is longer (that is, as the timing of the change is later), it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of hits in the variable display of the notice target. . Therefore, the hold display can be changed at a plurality of timings, and the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode changes can be noticed, thereby enhancing the entertainment of the game.

  In this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display is an arbitrary shift timing until the display of the change of the notice target is started. In the case where the display mode can be changed at an arbitrary timing until the display is started, for example, a plurality of types of change timing patterns capable of specifying a change timing (eg, a specific shift timing or a specific variable display). May be provided, and one of them may be selected in accordance with the prize winning determination result designation command.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 33, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the smaller the number of shifts (that is, the earlier the change timing), the more advantageous, and in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, the number of shifts is large. Is set to be more advantageous (that is, the later the change timing is), but in order to make it easier for the player to understand, for example, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the one with a larger number of shifts (that is, (Slower timing) may be set to be advantageous. Also, for example, in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, it may be set so that the smaller the number of shifts (that is, the earlier the change timing), the more advantageous.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, when the display result indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is a hit (for example, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, “sudden positive big hit” or “small hit”), and A look-ahead effect pattern determination table corresponding to the case of "missing" is provided. For example, even if the display result is a hit, a case of "normal big hit" or "probable big hit" and a case of "sudden probable big hit" Alternatively, a change timing determination table may be provided that determines a change timing (shift count) at a different rate in the case of “small hit”. Further, for example, a change timing determination table may be provided for determining any one of the change timings (the number of shifts) at a different rate for each of the change patterns indicated by the winning determination result designation command. By doing so, according to the change timing of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target, the rate of occurrence of a big hit in the change display of the notice target is changed, and the rate of reach production with high expectation is performed Can also be different.

  In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, a new hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, but the hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and any subsequent May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing described above, and may be changed from the special mode to the special mode at any later timing.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined in the process of step S67108, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first look-ahead effect pattern or the second look-ahead effect pattern (step S67107). In step S67109, if the pattern is the second look-ahead effect pattern (Y in step S67109), the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, a suggestion effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display changes can be executed at the shift timing. In addition, the suggestion effect is executed in one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In step S67110, effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect executed at the timing of the change of the hold display to either the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode at a different rate depending on the production mode of the suggested production. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode is high, and when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the hold indication is changed. The rate at which the display changes to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display is changed by the execution of the suggestion effect, and which special mode is likely to change according to which effect mode the suggestion effect is performed. It is suggested. Although the details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also executed at a shift timing other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish them, a suggestive effect performed at the timing of the change of the hold display is also referred to as a suggestive effect (success pattern), and a suggestive effect performed at a shift timing other than the change timing of the hold display (passing effect). Pattern). In this embodiment, both the suggestion effect (success pattern) and the suggestion effect (passing pattern) are executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes may differ according to the effect mode of the suggested effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in a first effect condition (for example, the first effect condition A may be different from the first effect condition and the second effect condition of this embodiment), the hold display changes. And the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode may be the first effect mode B different from the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the first effect mode A of this embodiment). In such a case, the rate at which the hold display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect condition (first effect condition A), the ratio of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggestion effect is in the second effect condition (first effect condition B). In the case of the execution, the ratio of the suggestion effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the suggested effect mode determination table. In step S67110 of the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30), effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display using the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, based on the extracted latest prize-winning-time determination result designation command, the final display mode determination table uses a ratio determined for each display result (variable display display result) indicated by the prize-winning-time determination result designation command. The effect mode is determined to be either the first effect mode or the second effect mode. For example, when the display result of the variable display is indicated as “losing” by the prize-winning determination result designation command (corresponding to the prize-winning determination result 1 to the prize-winning determination result 7), the effect control The CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, and determines the effect mode as the second effect mode at a rate of 20%. Further, for example, when the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command indicates that the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probably variable big hit” (from a prize-winning judgment result of 8 to a prize-winning judgment result of 12). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the effect mode as the second effect mode at a rate of 80%. Further, for example, when the display result of the fluctuation display is “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” by the prize winning determination result designation command (corresponding to the prize winning determination result 13 designation), an effect The control CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 50%, and determines the effect mode as the second effect mode at a rate of 50%.

  The characteristic feature of the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the display result is “compared to the case where the display result is“ out of place ”(corresponding to the designation of the prize judgment result 1 to the prize judgment result 7). In the case of "normal jackpot" or "probably variable jackpot" (corresponding to the designation of the prize judgment result 8 to the prize judgment result 12), the ratio determined in the second effect mode is set to be higher. That is. By providing such a feature, when the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode, the rate of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of the notice target is higher than when displayed in the first effect mode. can do. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “normal jackpot” or “probable variable jackpot”, since the final display mode of the hold display is high in the second special mode, the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode. Then, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes to the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode increases. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the suggested effects, and it is possible to focus on which of the effect types the suggested effects are to be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, a suggestion effect is provided for each display result indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command ("outside", "normal big hit" or "probable big hit" or "sudden probable big hit" or "small hit"). Is determined, for example, by setting a determination value (ratio) for determining an effect mode of a suggested effect for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result. Is also good. By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, in addition to increasing the ratio of occurrence of big hits in the variable display of the notice target, the ratio of the reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be higher.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is configured to be always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the hold display changes, but the suggestion effect may not be executed in some cases. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, the sense of surprise can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two types of production modes of the first production mode and the second production mode are provided as the production mode of the suggested production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more production modes are provided. Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be different from each other (the ratio selected according to the display result may be different).

  When the effect form of the suggested effect is determined by the processing of step S67110, effect control CPU 101 causes new display to be displayed in a special form on total holding storage display unit 18c (step S67112). In step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 controls the new hold display to be displayed in the special mode, and displays the information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and the suggestion effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating the mode is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the suggested mode of the effect mode are to be determined in the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41) described later.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 sets a hold change flag indicating that the hold storage in which the hold change effect is to be executed is included in the hold storage (step S67117). Note that the hold change flag is set until the change display as the target of the hold change effect ends.

  When the hold change flag is set, the prefetch effect (hold change effect or background change effect) for different hold memories (variable display) is superimposed by the process of step S67101 of the above-described prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 28). Is controlled not to execute. That is, in this embodiment, when the hold storage includes the hold change effect to be executed, the hold change effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is restricted that a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode or a special mode. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in the special mode or the special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be focused on.

  Also, in this embodiment, if the hold storage includes a hold memory for which a hold change effect is to be executed, a background change effect for a different hold memory (variable display) is performed. It is controlled not to execute. In the first place, in a background change effect described later, an attempt is made to improve interest by not intentionally clarifying a variable display to be a target of a notice effect (pre-reading effect). On the other hand, in the change-on-hold effect, as described above, the variable display (holding storage) to be the target of the notice effect is clarified to improve the interest. Therefore, if the variable display to be the target of the notice effect is executed for the different hold memory (variable display) and the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed clearly, the player will be confused. When such a pending change effect is executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the background change effect, and to improve the interest in the notice effect in the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, if the hold storage includes a hold memory that is to execute the hold change effect, control is performed so that the hold change effect is not repeatedly executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the pending change effects may be allowed at a fixed rate, or may be completely allowed. That is, even when the hold change flag is set, when a new start winning is generated, the hold change effect can be executed for the hold memory corresponding to the start winning, thereby enabling the hold change effect to be executed. It may be possible to allow a certain percentage or completely allow a plurality of pending storages in which a pending change effect is to be executed.

  Further, for example, when the hold storage includes a hold storage that is to execute the hold change effect, a new hold change effect may be easily executed. That is, the pending change effect may be easily executed repeatedly. In addition, for example, in the case of a specific game state (for example, a probable change state or a time saving state), the hold change effect may be easily executed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration in which the execution of the pending change effects is performed at a fixed rate, it is possible to increase the allowable rate when the game state is a specific game state.

  If the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second look-ahead effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if it is determined that the first look-ahead effect pattern is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 It is checked whether or not the change timing determined in S67108 is the time of the start winning (step S67113). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the shift number counter is 0. Then, if the change timing is the start winning prize (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 causes the combined suspension storage display unit 18c to display a new suspension display in the final display mode determined in step S67107. It controls (step S67114). Next, effect control CPU 101 sets a hold change flag indicating that the hold storage in which the hold change effect is to be executed is included in the hold storage (step S67117).

  If the change timing is not a winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display, as in step S67110 described above ( Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the combined hold storage display unit 18c to display a new hold display in a normal mode (step S67116), and executes a hold change effect in the hold memory. A suspension change flag indicating that the pending storage is included is set (step S67117). Also in step S67116, similarly to step S67112, effect control CPU 101 controls so as to display a new hold display, and information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and the information determined in step S67115. Information indicating the production mode of the suggested production is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which of the final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect has been determined in the effect symbol change start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the prize-winning-time determination result designation command, in the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28), the new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the special mode, and the first mode. The display process is performed in either the special mode or the second special mode.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed in the order of winning, but the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is prioritized. (1) to perform a hold change effect only for the change display of the first special symbol, and (2) change display of the second special symbol. And (3) a configuration in which a held change effect is performed only for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Can be considered.

  In the case where the configuration of (1) is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the shift number counter is set according to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number. Is set to a maximum of 4. However, in the configuration of the above (1), even if a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol is executed, if a winning in the second start winning opening 14 occurs, Since the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (prioritized instead of the winning order) and executed, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, even if it is a shift timing, an effect to be described later is performed. It is desirable that the value of the shift number counter is not subtracted in step S1808 of the symbol change start process (FIG. 41). Also, in the above configuration (3), similarly, when the hold change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol is performed, similarly, when the change display of the second special symbol is performed. It is preferable that the value of the shift number counter is not subtracted in step S1808 of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41) described later.

  Further, when the configuration of (2) is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the shift is performed according to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number. A maximum of 4 is set in the number counter. In this case, unlike the configuration of the above (1), the value of the shift number counter is decremented when the shift timing comes, regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. Similarly, in the case of executing the hold change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol in the configuration of the above (3), either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Even when the variable display is performed, the value of the shift number counter is decremented at the shift timing.

  In addition, when the change display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, the change display of the change of the first special symbol is not performed during the high base. May be. Further, when the change display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, the hold change effect based on the winning in the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game is not performed. You may. Such a configuration is employed, for example, during a high base or a big hit game, even if a winning in the first starting winning opening 13 occurs in the game control microcomputer 560, in step S1217 (starting opening switch passing process ( (See FIG. 14)), it is determined not to execute the prize-time effect process (FIG. 16), to discard the prize-time determination result designation command received by the effect control microcomputer 100, or to execute the hold change effect. Even if it is done, it can be realized by controlling it not to execute. In addition, when the configuration of the above (3) is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, during the high base or the big hit game, the hold based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is performed. A change effect may not be performed, but a hold change effect based on winning in the second start winning port 14 may be performed. Such a configuration is employed, for example, during a high base or a big hit game, even if a winning in the first starting winning opening 13 occurs in the game control microcomputer 560, in step S1217 (starting opening switch passing process ( (See FIG. 14)), the prize effect processing (FIG. 16) is not executed, or the prize time determination result designation command based on the prize in the first start winning port 13 received by the effect control microcomputer 100 is discarded. Alternatively, even if it is determined that the pending change effect is to be executed, it can be realized by controlling not to execute.

  In addition, when the configuration of (1) is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the hold memory based on the winning in the second starting winning port 14 exists in the state where the holding is present. Alternatively, when a winning in the first starting winning opening 13 occurs, the holding change effect for the holding memory based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 may not be executed. In addition, when the configuration of (1) is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the holding change effect for holding storage based on winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is provided. In the state where the execution is determined, when the winning in the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the execution of the already-determined change-of-hold effect may be canceled.

  In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. (1)), or a configuration ((2) above) for performing a hold change effect only for the change display of the second special symbol may be added. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. May not be performed on the basis of the winning.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the background change effect setting process (the process of step S67105e of the prefetch effect determining process (FIG. 28)). In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines a background mode in the background change effect to be executed (step S67206). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the background mode determination table shown in FIG. 35A based on the latest winning determination result designation command extracted in the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 28). The background mode is determined at a ratio determined for each display result of the variable display indicated by the winning determination result specifying command. For example, when the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command indicates "out" (corresponding to the prize-winning-judgment-result designation 1 to the prize-winning-judgment result 7 designation, see FIG. 12). The effect control CPU 101 sets the background mode of the background change effect to the fine weather mode of the first background mode at a rate of 70% and to the lightning mode of the second background mode at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is “normal jackpot” or “probably variable jackpot” (a prize-winning judgment result of 8 to a prize-winning judgment result of 12 is specified). In FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 101 sets the background mode of the background change effect to the fine weather mode of the first background mode at a rate of 30% and the lightning mode of the second background mode at a rate of 70%. To

  The characteristic feature of the background mode determination table shown in FIG. 35A is that the display result is “compared to the case where the display result is out of place (corresponding to the prize-winning determination result 1 designation to the prize-winning determination result 7 designation). In the case of “normal jackpot” or “probable change jackpot” (corresponding to a prize-winning judgment result of 8 to a prize-winning judgment result of 12), the judgment value is set such that the ratio determined in the second background mode is higher. It is set. With such a feature, when the background change effect is executed in the second background mode (lightning strike mode), the change of the notice target is changed as compared to when the background change effect is executed in the first background mode (fine weather mode). The rate of occurrence of a big hit in the display can be increased. That is, according to such a feature, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be increased when displayed in the second background mode (lightning strike mode) than in the first background mode (clear weather mode), and the background change effect can be achieved. When executed, the player can be interested in which method is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35 (A), each display result indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command (“outside”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, or “sudden probable big hit” or “small hit”) The determination value (ratio) for determining the final display mode is set in), but the determination value (ratio) for determining the final display mode is determined for each variation pattern indicated by the prize-winning determination result designation command. Each may be set. By doing so, in addition to increasing the rate of occurrence of big hits in the variable display of the notice target when the hold display is displayed in the second background mode, or in place of this, a reach effect with a high degree of expectation Can be increased. Thereby, the variation of the background change effect can be enriched, and the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, two types of display modes, that is, a first background mode (fine weather mode) and a second background mode (lightning strike mode) are provided as background modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided. May be provided so that the degree of expectation differs (the ratio selected according to the display result differs).

  After determining the background aspect in the background change effect executed by the process of step S67206, the background aspect is stored in a predetermined storage area, and then the effect control CPU 101 sets a background change flag (step S67217). ), The background change effect setting process ends.

  When the background change flag is set, the prefetch effect (hold change effect or background change effect) for different hold storage (variable display) is repeated by the process of step S67101 of the above-described lookahead effect determination process (FIG. 28). Is controlled not to execute. Therefore, the effect control is performed so as to avoid the state where the background change effect is repeatedly executed, and not to execute the hold change effect for different hold memories (variable display) when the background change effect is being executed. Is controlled by the CPU 101. As described above, in the first place, in the background change effect, an attempt is made to improve the interest by not intentionally clarifying the variable display to be the target of the notice effect (pre-reading effect). On the other hand, in the pending change effect, it is intended to improve the interest by clarifying the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. Therefore, if a background change effect is executed together with a hold change effect in which a variable display targeted for a notice effect is performed for a different hold memory (variable display), the player will be confused. When such a background change effect is executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the hold change effect, and to improve the interest in the notice effect in the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, if the hold storage includes a hold memory that is to execute the background change effect, the background change effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the background change effect repeatedly may be allowed at a fixed rate or may be completely allowed. That is, even when the background change flag is set, when a new start winning is generated, the background change effect can be executed with respect to the holding storage corresponding to the start winning, thereby enabling the holding storage to be executed. It may be possible to allow a certain percentage or completely allow a plurality of on-hold memories for executing the background change effect to be included therein.

  Further, for example, when the hold storage includes a hold memory that is to execute a background change effect, a new background change effect may be easily executed. That is, the background change effect may be easily executed repeatedly. In addition, for example, in a specific game state (for example, a probable change state or a time saving state), the background change effect may be easily executed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration in which the execution of the background change effect is performed repeatedly at a fixed rate, in a specific game state, it can be realized by increasing the permitted rate.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the double change effect setting process (the process of step S67105f of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 28)). In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines a background mode in the background change effect to be executed (step S67306). The determination of the background mode is performed based on the background mode determination table shown in FIG. 35A, similarly to step S67206 described above. After the background aspect in the background change effect executed by the process of step S67306 is determined, the background aspect is stored in a predetermined storage area, and then the effect control CPU 101 sets the background change flag in the same manner as in step S67217 described above. Is set (step S67307), and the flow shifts to step S67308. That is, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect of both the hold change effect and the background change effect for one hold memory, it is determined to execute only the background change effect for the one hold memory. In a manner similar to that performed, the background mode in the background change effect is determined, and the background change flag is set.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 finally decides in which display mode to display the hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage (the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold storage) to be notified) ( Step S67308). Here, unlike the above-described pending change effect setting process, in the double change effect setting process, the final display mode determination table for double change in FIG. 37 is used instead of the final display mode determination table in FIG. The final display mode is determined in accordance with the winning determination result and the background mode determined in step S67306. In step S67308, effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be either the first special mode or the second special mode.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a final change mode determination table for double change. In step S67308, the effect control CPU 101 determines in what display form the suspension display corresponding to the latest suspension storage is to be finally displayed using the double change final display form determination table shown in FIG. , Final display mode). Specifically, based on the extracted latest prize-time determination result designation command, for each display result of the variable display indicated by the prize-time determination result designation command in the final display mode determination table for double change, and in step S67306. The final display mode is determined at a rate determined for each of the determined background modes.

  For example, if the display result of the variable display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command indicates “out” (corresponding to the prize-winning-judgment result 1 to the prize-winning-judgment result 7), it is determined in step S67306. When the performed background mode is the first background mode, effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be the first special mode at a rate of 90%, and changes the final display mode to the second special mode at a rate of 10%. decide. If the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command indicates “out” (corresponding to the prize-winning-judgment result 1 to the prize-winning-judgment result 7), it is determined in step S67306. When the performed background mode is the second background mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be the first special mode at a rate of 60%, and changes the final display mode to the second special mode at a rate of 40%. decide.

  Further, for example, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is "normal big hit" or "probable variable big hit" (the prize-winning-judgment result is designated from 8 to the prize-judging result is designated 12). When the background mode determined in step S67306 is the first background mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 30%, and determines the final display mode at a rate of 70%. The display mode is determined to be the second special mode. Further, when the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-specifying command indicates "normal big hit" or "probable variable big hit" (corresponding to the prize-winning judgment result 8 to the prize-winning judgment result 12) If the background mode determined in step S67306 is the second background mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be the first special mode at a rate of 10%, and the final display mode at a rate of 90%. Is determined in the second special mode.

  Also, for example, when the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command indicates “suddenly-variable-big-hit” or “small-hit” (corresponding to the prize-winning-judgment result 13 specification), step S67306. Is the first background mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be the first special mode at a rate of 40%, and sets the final display mode to the second special mode at a rate of 60%. Determine the mode. If it is indicated that the display result of the fluctuation display indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is “suddenly-variable-big-hit” or “small-hit” (corresponding to the prize-winning-judgment result of 13), it is determined in step S67306. When the performed background mode is the second background mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode to be the first special mode at a rate of 20%, and changes the final display mode to the second special mode at a rate of 80%. decide.

  The characteristic of the double change final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the display result is “out” (corresponding to the prize-winning determination result 1 to the prize-winning determination result 7). When the display result is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot” (corresponding to the prize-winning judgment result of 8 to the prize-winning judgment result of 12), the ratio determined in the second special mode is higher. That is, the judgment value is set. With such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of the notice target is higher than when the hold display is displayed in the first special mode. can do. In other words, according to such a feature, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be increased when displayed in the second special mode than in the first special mode. The player can be interested in which display mode is displayed.

  Also, what is characteristic in the double change final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that when the background mode determined in step S67306 is the second special mode, the background mode is the first special mode. The determination value is set so that the rate at which the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode is higher than in the case. Regardless of whether the prize-winning result is "out", "normal big hit" or "probable big hit", and "sudden probable big hit" or "small hit" The determination value is determined such that the ratio determined as the second special mode when determined as the second background mode is higher than the ratio determined as the second special mode when determined as the first background mode. It is set. By providing such a feature, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes to the second special mode when the background mode changes to the second background mode, as compared to when the background mode changes to the first background mode. Can be higher. According to such a feature, when the background image is the second background mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first background mode, the display mode of the hold display is the first special mode having a lower degree of expectation than the second special mode. Reducing the frequency of change to the mode to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the execution of the low-expected notice effect (first special aspect) after the high-expected notice effect (second background aspect) Can be.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, the final result is displayed for each of the display results indicated by the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command ("out", "normal big hit" or "probable big hit", or "sudden probable big hit" or "small hit"). A determination value (ratio) for determining the display mode is set. For example, a determination value (ratio) for determining the final display mode is determined for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result specification command. It may be set. By doing so, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to or instead of increasing the rate of occurrence of big hits in the variable display of the notice target, the reach with a high expectation is high. The rate at which the performance is performed can also be increased.

  After determining the final display mode (after step S67308 in the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36)), effect control CPU 101 changes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold storage) of the notice target. The change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) to be changed is determined, and the determined change timing (the number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (the number of shifts) (step S67309).

  Here, in the present embodiment, if both the hold change effect and the background change effect are performed for one hold memory (variable display), the one hold memory (double change effect) is executed. Unlike the case where only the hold change effect is executed for (variable display), the hold display as the target of the hold change effect is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed in the special mode. That is, in the pending change effect relating to the double change effect, the pending change effect of the second look-ahead effect pattern is not executed, and only the hold change effect of the first look-ahead effect pattern can be executed. As described above, in this embodiment, when the double change effect is executed, after the background change effect in which the target of the notice effect is difficult to be recognized is executed, the suspended change in which the target of the notice effect is recognizable is performed. By performing the effect, the interest is enhanced without impairing the characteristics of both of the notice effects, but if the prefetch effect of the second prefetch effect pattern is executed, a new start-up is performed. By displaying the hold display corresponding to the prize in a special mode, the hold display (holding storage and change display) as a target of the notice effect can be recognized before the execution of the background change effect, and the background change effect can be recognized. Features will be impaired. In order to prevent this, when both of the hold change effect and the background change effect are performed for one hold memory (variable display), the first look-ahead effect pattern is held. Only the change effect is executable.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination table for double change. In the above-described step S67309, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target based on the change timing determination table for double change and the total number of hold storages. . Here, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing of the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target (the number of times of shift ) Is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the determination value is assigned so that the change timing (the number of shifts) is not determined to be 0. Therefore, when both of the hold change effect and the background change effect are performed for one hold memory (variable display), the hold display to be the target of the hold change effect is the first display at the timing of the start winning. It is not displayed in the special mode or the second special mode. Then, the background image changes to the first background mode or the second background mode from the fluctuation display first executed after the start winning, and during the execution of the fluctuation display or during the execution of the fluctuation display after the fluctuation display. The suggestion effect is executed, and the display mode of the hold display as the target of the hold change effect changes to the first special mode or the second special mode via the suggestion effect. That is, since the change timing (the number of shifts) is not determined to be 0, the execution of the hold change effect before the background change effect is executed is restricted, and one variable display (hold storage) is targeted. In the case of executing both the notice effect (double change effect) of the hold change effect and the background change effect, control is performed so that the display mode of the hold display is always changed after the start of the background change effect.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, when performing both the notice effect (double change effect) of the hold change effect and the background change effect for one hold memory (variable display), the background change effect is executed. "Execute the hold change effect after performing" means "after the background change effect is started, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold memory (variable display) targeted for the notice effect (double change effect)" Change to a special mode. " Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest caused by the execution of the background change effect after the hold change effect is executed for one variable display (hold storage).

  For example, when the total number of stored suspensions at the time of the start winning is three, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) as 1 at a rate of 20% and changes the change timing (shift number) at a rate of 80%. Is determined to be 2. Also, when the total number of stored suspensions at the time of the start winning is four, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) as 1 at a rate of 15%, and changes the timing (shift) at a rate of 20%. Is determined as 2 and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 3 at a rate of 65%. That is, when the total number of pending storages is four, the ratio determined to execute the pending change effect at a later timing than when the total number of pending storages is two is higher.

  What is characteristic in the change timing determination table for double change shown in FIG. 38 is that the determination value is set such that the larger the total number of stored suspensions at the time of the start winning, the higher the ratio of determining the change timing with a larger number of shifts. That is being done. By having such a feature, when both the hold change effect and the background change effect are performed for one hold memory, the hold change effect is executed immediately after the execution of the background change effect. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the hold display to be the target of the announcement effect becomes apparent at an early stage.

  As described above, the method of determining the change timing (shift number) of the hold display in the double change effect setting process is the method of determining the change timing (shift number) when only the hold change effect described above is executed (FIG. 33). In contrast to this, it is not determined whether the judgment result at the time of the starting prize is out of place or a hit ("normal big hit", "probable big hit", "sudden positive big hit" or "small hit"). , Is determined according to the total number of reserved storages. Not limited to such a form, the method of determining the change timing (shift count) of the hold display in the double change effect setting process is a method of determining the change timing (shift count) when only the hold change effect is executed (the As in the case of the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table), the prize-winning determination result is a hit ("normal large hit", "probably variable big hit", "sudden probable large hit" or In the case of “small hit”, the determination value may be set so that the rate of determining the change timing with the smaller number of shifts is higher. In addition, the method of determining the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display in the double change effect setting process is the same as in the above-described second look-ahead effect change timing determination table) when the prize-winning determination result is “out”. In comparison, when the prize-winning determination result is a hit ("normal big hit", "probable big hit", "sudden positive big hit" or "small hit"), the rate of determining the change timing with a larger number of shifts is higher. The determination value may be set so as to be as follows. As a result, it is possible to give an interest to the timing at which the suspended display changes, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the period from when the background change effect is executed to when the hold change effect is executed is determined according to the total number of hold storages at the time of the start winning. In the case of a gaming machine in which one of the variable display based on the memory and the variable display based on the second hold storage is preferentially executed, from the execution of the background change effect to the execution of the hold change effect May be determined according to the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing a double change effect only for the first hold storage, the larger the number of the first hold storage at the time of starting winning, the later the change timing (the number of shifts increases. 2) It may be determined that the pending change effect is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the background change effect at the time of the start winning, the background image is changed from the next change display to the first background mode or the second background mode. However, the timing of the background change may be determined in accordance with the determination ratio determined for each of the total number of reserved storages and the number of shifts, similarly to the timing of the hold change. That is, the background may be changed not only at the first shift timing but also at the second shift timing or the third shift timing. In such a case, it is preferable that the hold change effect is executed after the change display in which the background change effect is executed.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined in the process of step S67309, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display (step S67310). In step S67310, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display, as in steps S67110 and S67115 described above. For example, it is determined whether to use the first effect mode or the second effect mode based on the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the combined hold storage display unit 18c to display a new hold display in a normal mode (step S67311), and executes a hold change effect in the hold memory. A pending change flag indicating that the pending storage is included is set (step S67312). In step S67311, similarly to steps S67112 and S67116 described above, effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display, and displays information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67308 and step S67308. The information indicating the presentation mode of the suggested presentation determined in S67310 is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which of the final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect has been determined in the effect symbol change start process described later.

  As described above, in the determination at the time of the start prize, both the hold change effect and the background change effect of the notice effect (double change effect) are executed for one hold memory (variable display) corresponding to the start prize. Is determined, the background mode is determined in the same manner as when it is determined to execute only the background change effect, and a prize-winning determination result and a different method from the case where it is determined to execute only the hold change effect. The final display mode is determined based on the determined background mode, and the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined based on the total number of pending storages in a different manner from the case where it is determined that only the pending change effect is to be executed. The suggested effect mode is determined in the same manner as when it is determined to execute only the change effect.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis processing is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Processing during effect symbol variation (step S802): The switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern is controlled, and the end of the variation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803).

  Effect design fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing stop of all symbols, the fluctuation of effect symbols is stopped, and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Perform control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening opening command or a special winning opening opening command is received, display control of the number of rounds on the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S806).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S806): The effect display device 9 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag has been set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIGS. 41 to 43 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol fluctuation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first prize-time determination result designation command (oldest prize-time determination result designation command) stored in the prize-time command storage area, and executes the prize-time command. The contents of the storage area are shifted, the first hold display in the total hold storage display section 18c is deleted, and the remaining hold displays are shifted one by one, and the total hold storage number display in the total hold storage display section 18c is performed. Is updated (step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing, and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed at the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed at the fourth is displayed at the third display area. The area is shifted to the area, and the hold display that has been displayed for the fifth time is shifted to the fourth display area. In addition, in a case where the variation display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, the effect control CPU 101 is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol. When the first symbol change designation command reception flag is set, and the first symbol change designation command receiving flag is set, the first winning combination stored in the first winning combination command storage area is executed. The time determination result designation command is deleted, and the contents of the first winning command storage area are shifted. Further, when performing the variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second winning The first prize-winning-time determination result designation command stored in the command storage area is deleted, and the contents of the second prize-winning command storage area are shifted.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1801).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display result of the effect symbol (in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S1801 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command)). The stop symbol is determined (step S1802). That is, when the processing of step S1802 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol A display result determining means for determining a symbol is realized. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result specifying command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 2 specifying command), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol as a stop symbol. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in even-number symbols (usually a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit) is determined. If the received display result designation command indicates a probability change jackpot (if the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the three symbols are odd symbols as stop symbols (probable variation). A combination of effect symbols aligned with a stop symbol that recalls the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. Then, in the case of a loss (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. If the received display result specifying command suddenly indicates a probability change big hit or a small hit (if the received display result specifying command is a display result 4 specifying command or a display result 5 specifying command), the effect control CPU 101 Determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random symbol for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of the effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values corresponding to the extracted random numbers.

  In addition, also about the effect design, the stop design which reminds of the big hit is called the big hit design. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a probability variable jackpot is called a probability variable jackpot symbol, and a stop symbol that recalls a normal jackpot is called a normal symbol jackpot symbol. Then, a stop symbol that reminds the user of a loss is referred to as a “off symbol”.

  When the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined in step S1802, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether only the hold change flag is set (step S1803). That is, it is determined whether the pending change flag is set but the background change flag is not set. If only the hold change flag has been set (Y in step S1803), that is, if the hold change flag has been set but the background change flag has not been set, the hold change effect is set in the hold memory as the target (target). Since this indicates that the change storage is included or that the change display to be the target of the change-on-hold effect is started, step S1804 for executing the change-on-hold effect or starting the target change of the change-on-hold effect is performed. Execute the following processing.

  In step S1804, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect total storage number counter for effect (step S1804). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the effect total pending storage number counter has become 0 as a result of the subtraction of the effect total pending storage number counter (step S1805). When the value of the effect total pending storage number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1805), it indicates that it is the timing at which the fluctuation display targeted for the suspension change production is executed, so the target fluctuation flag is set. Then (S1806), a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S1806A), and the flow shifts to step S1831. In addition, the target change flag is a change display which is a target of the hold change effect (including the hold change effect related to the double change effect) or a background change effect described later (including the background change effect related to the double change effect). This flag is set to indicate that the variation display that is the target is being executed, is set in step S1806, S1816, or S1823, and is displayed in step S854a of the effect symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 47 described later). Is reset when is completed.

  In step S1805, if the value of the effect total pending storage number counter is not 0 (N in step S1805), the processing after step S1807 for executing the pending change production is executed. Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (the number of shifts) is greater than 0 (step S1807). When the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0, it is determined that a hold change effect for changing a display mode is performed for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c. It is shown that. Therefore, in step S1807, it is confirmed whether or not execution of the hold change effect (change of the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  When the value of the shift number counter is not greater than 0 (N in step S1807), that is, when the value of the shift number counter is 0 and the hold change effect is executed (change of the display mode of the hold display). If not determined, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step S1806A), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S1831 in FIG. 43). ). Here, when the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning, the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 in the hold change effect setting processing executed at the timing of the start winning. If it is set and the hold display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a timing (determined change timing) after the timing of the start winning prize, a suggestion effect at the time of the change is accompanied. The value of the number-of-shifts counter becomes 0 in the effect symbol variation start processing (steps S1808 and S1809) related to the variation display. Accordingly, only the hold change flag is set (Y in step S1803), the displayed change to be started is not the target change (N in step S1805), and the value of the shift counter is 0 (step S1807). In N), one of the reserved displays is already displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. In this embodiment, when the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode, there is no case where the display mode of the hold display further changes thereafter. If the display has already been displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, it does not execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) described later (does not execute steps S1810 and S1811), and responds to the fluctuation pattern. The selected process table is selected (step S1806A).

  On the other hand, if the value of the number-of-shifts counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1807), that is, if it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed (to change the display mode of the hold display), the effect control is performed. The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the shift counter (step S1808). Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the shift number counter has become 0 (step S1809). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift number counter in step S1808, the fact that the value of the shift number counter has become 0 means that any one of the display modes of the hold display displayed on the total hold storage display section 18c is changed. This indicates that it is time to execute the pending change effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1809, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display.

  If the value of the shift number counter is not 0 in step S1809, that is, if it is not the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display (N in step S1809), the effect control CPU 101 executes the process. Is shifted to step S1810. On the other hand, when the value of the shift number counter is 0 (Y in step S1809), that is, when it is the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 executes The process moves to S1812.

  If the value of the number-of-shifts counter is not 0 (N in step S1809), effect control CPU 101 determines an effect mode of a suggested effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1810). Here, the processing of step S1810 is not executed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the hold change effect. Therefore, in step S1810, although it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggested effect executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) executed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect executed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestion effect (passing pattern).

  In step S1810, effect control CPU 101 determines that the pending change flag is set, that is, based on the fact that one of the pending displays in sum total pending storage display section 18c is the target (target) of the pending change production. Then, it is determined not to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) or to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) in the first effect mode or the second effect mode at the ratio of the suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table shown in FIG. In the suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table, determination values corresponding to the determined items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, or “second effect mode”) are assigned. In (A) and the examples shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and (B) which will be described later, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (passing pattern), and determines a determination item (“no effect”, “No. "1st production mode" or "2nd production mode").

  For example, when the pending change flag is set, that is, when any pending display is the subject of the pending change effect in the combined pending storage display unit 18c, the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is executed at a rate of 0%. It is determined not to be performed, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (A) and FIG. 42 (B) to be described later, in this embodiment, when the hold change flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays When it is determined to change to the special mode or the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 42 (A) described later, the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than in the other case. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, so that the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggested effect may not be executed. However, also in this case, it is desirable that the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the suspended display is not displayed in the special mode.

  If the hold change flag is set, that is, if it is determined in the combined hold storage display unit 18c to change any of the hold displays to the first special mode or the second special mode, the hold Depending on whether the final display mode of the display is the first special mode or the second special mode, the effect mode of the suggested effect may be determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode at different rates. . For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode, the effect mode of the suggested effect is changed to the second effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode. The determined ratio may be increased. Further, in the present embodiment, as described later, in the effect display device 9, display control in which an arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed as a suggestive effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display changes. When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of a suggestive effect (success pattern)), display control is performed so that the flying arrow sticks into the hold display corresponding to the hold memory to be notified. When the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of the suggestive effect (passing pattern)), display control is performed so that the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1810, there is no need to specify the hold display corresponding to the hold storage to be notified using the effect total hold storage number counter, as in steps S1812 and S1829 described later. Note that, for example, at both the timing when the display mode of the hold display is changed and the timing when the timing is not the timing, the effect display device 9 indicates, as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes. The display control is performed such that the arrow that has flown from the right side of the display area pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold memory to be notified, and when it is time to change the display mode of the hold display, the display of the hold display that the arrow pierces is performed. When the display mode is changed (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display pierced by the arrow is not changed (the suggestion effect (passing pattern in this example). )). In this case, in step S1810, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the hold display corresponding to the hold storage to be notified using the effect total hold storage number counter, as in steps S1812 and S1829 described later, A process table for executing a suggestion effect for the hold display specified in step S1811 or S1828 may be selected, or a hold display in which an arrow is inserted is randomly determined from the hold displays displayed, and the determination is made. A process table for executing a suggestion effect for the held display may be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the variation pattern of the determined suggested effect (passing pattern) (step S1811). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1831 in FIG. 43).

  If it is determined in step S1809 that the value of the number-of-shifts counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect mode of the suggestive effect. Then, the final display mode of the hold display specified by the effect total hold storage number counter and the process table for changing the display mode according to the change pattern are selected (step S1812). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1831 in FIG. 43).

  The process table for changing the display mode is a process of displaying the change of the effect symbol and executing a suggestion effect (success pattern) at the start of the change of the effect symbol, and executing a hold change effect of changing the display mode of the specific hold display. 4 is a table in which process data for performing the control to be performed is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of process tables for changing the display mode are provided in accordance with the mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) to be executed and the mode of the change-on-hold effect. Further, in this embodiment, in step S1812, the production mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) stored in the pending change effect setting process (FIG. 30) (step S67110 or S67115) and stored (step S67110 or S67115 in this example). 1st production mode or the 2nd production mode) and the hold display of the production target specified by the production total pending storage number counter (for example, when the value of the production total pending storage number counter is 2, the total pending storage display unit 18c) , And the final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the second display mode) determined in the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30) (step S67106) and stored. Based on the above, the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed in any manner, and any pending display is changed to any display manner. It is possible to specify whether to perform a pending change in performance. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 sets a plurality of types of display modes according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total number of memory for hold for effect storage, and the variation pattern. By selecting one of the process tables for the change time and controlling the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the selected process table for the change of the display mode, the effect determined in the pending change effect setting process A suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed in the mode, and a hold change effect for changing the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target to the determined display mode can be executed.

  In the process of step S1803, if it is not the state where only the hold change flag is set (N in step S1803), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether only the background change flag is set. Is confirmed (step S1813). That is, it is confirmed whether the background change flag is set but the hold change flag is not set. If the hold change flag is not set and only the background change flag is set (Y in step S1813), the hold memory that is the target (target) of the background change effect is included in the hold memory. Or the start of the fluctuation display as the target (target) of the background change effect, the process after step S1814 for executing the background change effect or starting the target change of the background change effect is executed. .

  In step S1814, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect total storage number counter for effect (step S1814). Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the effect total pending storage number counter has become 0 as a result of the subtraction of the effect total pending storage number counter (step S1815). When the value of the effect total storage number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1815), it indicates that it is time to execute the variable display targeted for the background change effect, so the target variable flag is set. (S1816), and then proceeds to step S1817. Note that the target change flag is a target of the change display which is the target of the background change effect (including the background change effect related to the double change effect) or the target of the hold change effect (including the hold change effect related to the double change effect). Is set in step S1806, S1816, or S1823, and reset in step S854a of the effect symbol change stop process (FIG. 47 described later). Here, the target change flag is set to reset the hold change flag or the background change effect flag (to execute step S854b or S854c) in the effect design change stop process (FIG. 47) executed thereafter. Things.

  If the target variation flag is set in step S1816, or if the value of the effect total pending storage number counter is not 0 in step S1815 (N in step S1815), the effect control CPU 101 then proceeds to the background change. A process table for changing the background mode according to the background mode of the effect and the variation pattern is selected (step S1817). The background mode of the background change effect is based on the background mode determined and stored in step S67206 of the background change effect setting process (FIG. 35), and the change pattern is read from the change pattern command storage area in step S1801. Based on data. After the process of selecting the process table, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S1831 in FIG. 43). Here, the process table for changing the background pattern is used to perform control for setting the background image of the effect symbol to the first background mode or the second background mode at the time of the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol, together with the change display of the effect symbol. This is a table in which process data is set.

  In step S1813, when the effect control CPU 101 confirms that only the background change flag is not set (N), the process proceeds to step S1820 in FIG. 42, where the hold change flag and the background change flag are set. It is checked whether both of the flags are set, or whether neither flag is set (step S1820 in FIG. 42). When both the hold change flag and the background change flag are set (Y in step S1820), that is, the hold change effect and the background change effect are executed for one hold memory (variable display). If it is determined to be, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S1821.

  In step S1821, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect total pending storage number counter (step S1821). Next, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the effect total pending storage number counter has become 0 as a result of the subtraction of the effect total pending storage number counter (step S1822). When the value of the effect total pending storage number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1822), it is determined that it is the timing at which the variable display targeted for the pending change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) is executed. Therefore, the target variation flag is set (S1823), and the flow shifts to step S1830.

  In step S1822, if the value of the effect total pending storage number counter is not 0 (N in step S1822), the processing after step S1824 for executing the pending change effect and the background change effect is executed. Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (the number of shifts) is larger than 0 (step S1824). When the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0, it is determined that a hold change effect for changing a display mode is performed for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c. It is shown that. Therefore, in step S1824, it is confirmed whether execution of the hold change effect (change of the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  If the target variation flag is set in step S1823, or if the value of the shift number counter is not greater than 0 in step S1824 (N in step S1824), that is, if the value of the shift number counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 Next, a process table for changing the background mode according to the background mode and the fluctuation pattern of the background change effect is selected (step S1830), and the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (FIG. 43, step S1831). Here, the process table for changing the background pattern is used to perform control for setting the background image of the effect symbol to the first background mode or the second background mode at the time of the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol, together with the change display of the effect symbol. This is a table in which process data is set. Here, when the hold display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a timing (determined change timing) after the timing of the start winning prize, a variable display accompanied by a suggestion effect at the time of the change. The value of the shift number counter becomes 0 in the effect symbol variation start process (steps S1825 and S1826) according to. Therefore, both the hold change flag and the background change flag are set (Y in step S1820), the fluctuation display to be started is not the target fluctuation (N in step S1822), and the value of the shift number counter is If it is 0 (N in step S1824), it means that any pending display has already been displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. In this embodiment, when the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode, there is no case where the display mode of the hold display further changes thereafter. If the display is already displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, the background mode and the variation are not executed without executing the suggestion effect (passing pattern) described later (without executing steps S1827 and S1828). A process table corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S1830).

  The background mode of the background change effect in step S1830 is based on the background mode determined and stored in step S67306 of the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36), and the change pattern is stored in step S1801. It is based on the data read from the area. After the process of selecting the process table, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S1831 in FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, when the value of the shift number counter is larger than 0 (Y in step S1824), that is, when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed (to change the display mode of the hold display), the effect control is performed. The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the shift counter (step S1825). Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift number counter has become 0 (step S1826). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the number-of-shifts counter in step S1825, the fact that the value of the number-of-shifts counter has become 0 means that any one of the display modes of the hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is changed. This indicates that it is time to execute the pending change effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1826, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1826, when the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display (N in step S1826), the effect control CPU 101 executes the processing. Is transferred to step S1827. On the other hand, when the value of the shift number counter is 0 (Y in step S1826), that is, when it is the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 executes The process moves to S1829.

  On the other hand, in step S1820 described above, if neither the hold change flag nor the background change flag is set (N in step S1820), that is, the hold change effect is also performed for one hold storage (variable display). When it is determined not to execute the background change effect, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S1827.

  If it is determined that neither the hold change effect nor the background change effect is to be executed (N in step S1820), and if the value of the shift number counter is not 0 (N in step S1826), the effect control CPU 101 An effect mode of a suggestive effect indicating that the display mode of the display changes is determined (step S1827). Here, the processing of step S1827 is not executed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the hold change effect. Therefore, in step S1827, although it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggested effect executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) executed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect executed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestion effect (passing pattern).

  In step S1827, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the hold change flag is not set, that is, if none of the hold displays in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a target (target) of the hold change effect, FIG. At the ratio of the suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table shown in A), it is determined not to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) or to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Further, when the hold change flag is set, that is, when any hold display is the target (hold) of the hold change effect in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 sets the state shown in FIG. ), It is determined not to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) or to execute it in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In the suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table, determination values corresponding to the determined items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, or “second effect mode”) are assigned. In the examples shown in (A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (passing pattern), and determines a determination item (“no effect”, “No. "1st production mode" or "2nd production mode"). The hold change flag is always set when the value of the shift number counter is determined to be greater than 0 (N) in step S1826, and in the case where the hold change flag is not set in step S1820. Occurs when it is determined that both the hold change flag and the background change flag are not set (N).

  For example, when the hold change flag is not set, that is, when none of the hold displays is the target of the hold change effect in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the suggestion effect (passing pattern) must be executed at a rate of 60%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 30%, and that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 10%. When the hold change flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is the target of the hold change effect in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is executed at a rate of 0%. It is determined not to be performed, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and (B), in this embodiment, when the hold change flag is set, that is, one of the hold displays in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. If it is determined to change to the two special modes, the suggested effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is not. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, so that the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggested effect may not be executed. However, also in this case, it is desirable that the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the suspended display is not displayed in the special mode.

  When the hold change flag is set, that is, when it is determined in the combined hold storage display unit 18c that any of the hold displays is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode, the hold change flag is set. Depending on whether the final display mode of the display is the first display mode or the second display mode, the effect mode of the suggested effect may be determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode at different rates. . For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second display mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first display mode, the effect mode of the suggested effect is changed to the second effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first effect mode. The determined ratio may be increased. Further, in the present embodiment, as described later, in the effect display device 9, display control in which an arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed as a suggestive effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display changes. When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of a suggestive effect (success pattern)), display control is performed so that the flying arrow sticks into the hold display corresponding to the hold memory to be notified. When the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of the suggestive effect (passing pattern)), display control is performed so that the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1828, it is not necessary to specify the hold display corresponding to the hold storage to be notified using the effect total hold storage number counter as in step S1812 and step S1829 to be described later. Note that, for example, at both the timing when the display mode of the hold display is changed and the timing when the timing is not the timing, the effect display device 9 indicates, as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes. The display control is performed such that the arrow that has flown from the right side of the display area pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold memory to be notified, and when it is time to change the display mode of the hold display, the display of the hold display that the arrow pierces is performed. When the display mode is changed (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display pierced by the arrow is not changed (the suggestion effect (passing pattern in this example). )). In this case, in step S1828, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the hold display corresponding to the hold storage to be notified using the effect total hold storage number counter, as in step S1812 and step S1829 to be described later. In step S1828, a process table for executing a suggestion effect for the hold display specified in step S1828 may be selected, or a hold display in which an arrow is pierced is randomly determined from the displayed hold displays, and the determination is made. A process table for executing a suggestion effect for the hold display may be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores a process table corresponding to the background mode determined and stored in step S67306 of the double change effect setting process and the determined effect mode (passing pattern) of the determined effect mode (passing pattern). It is selected (step S1828). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1831 in FIG. 43).

  If it is determined in step S1826 that the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the double change effect setting. At the time of the double change according to the background mode determined and stored in step S67306 of the process, the display mode of the suggested effect, the final display mode of the hold display specified by the counter for the total number of stored storages for the effect, and the variation pattern Process tables (for display mode change and background mode change) are selected (step S1829). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1831 in FIG. 43).

  The process table for the double change (for the display mode change and the background mode change) is to display the change of the effect symbol and to display the background image of the effect symbol at the start of the change of the effect symbol in the first background mode or the second image. 2 is a table in which process data for performing control for executing the background mode, performing a suggestion effect (success pattern), and performing control for executing a hold change effect for changing a display mode of a specific hold display is set. . In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display mode changes are performed according to the determined background mode (the first background mode or the second background mode), the suggested effect to be executed (success pattern), or the mode of the hold change effect. Is provided. In this embodiment, in step S1829, the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36) determines (step S67306) and stores the stored background mode (in this example, the first background mode or the second background mode). ), An effect mode (in the present example, the first effect mode or the second effect mode) of the suggested effect (success pattern) determined in the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36) (step S67310) and stored. A hold display of an effect target specified by the effect summing pending storage number counter (for example, when the value of the effecting summing pending storage number counter is 2, the second suspension display in the summing pending storage display unit 18c); The final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the first display mode) determined in the double change effect setting process (FIG. 36) (step S67308) and stored. Based on the second display mode), the background image of the effect symbol is set to what background mode, the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed in what mode, and which hold display is changed to what display mode. It is possible to specify whether to execute the pending change effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 determines a plurality of effects in accordance with the background mode, the effect mode of the suggestive effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total number of stored hold memory for effect counter, and the variation pattern. By selecting one of the two types of process tables for double change, and performing control of the rendering device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the selected process table for double change, a double change effect setting process is performed. The effect symbols are variably displayed in the background mode determined in the above, the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed in the effect mode determined in the double change effect setting process, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the preview target is determined. Hold effect for changing the display mode to the changed display mode.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is configured by data in which a plurality of combinations of a process timer set value, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating the mode of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the effect symbol, the data indicating the mode of the hold change effect in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, and suggestions Data indicating the mode of the effect, data indicating the mode of the background change effect, and the like are described. That is, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control for displaying the effect symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. It should be noted that data corresponding to an effect component that does not become a control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value (for example, the hold control described in the display control execution data of the process table used when the hold change effect is not executed) Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as the data indicating the mode of the change effect.

  The process table shown in FIG. 45 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Further, a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanying the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated in accordance with the determined stopped symbol, the pseudo-run and the temporary stop symbol in the slide effect. You may.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 generates the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component and the effect component as the effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speakers 27R and 27L as effect parts is executed (step S1832). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 to output audio from the speakers 27R and 27L.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control such that the effect pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. May be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S1833), and sets the value of the effect control process flag during the effect symbol fluctuation process (effect control process). The value is set to a value corresponding to step S802 of the process (FIG. 39), which will be described later as FIG. 46 (step S1834).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol process (step S802) in the effect control process process (FIG. 39). In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S1841) and decrements the value of the fluctuation time timer by 1 (step S1842). When the process timer times out (step S1843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S1844). In addition, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S1845).

  Next, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S1849), effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S8031) (step S1851). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received has been set (step S1850), the flow shifts to step S1851. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the control shifts to the control for stopping the fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the normal variation time has elapsed (at the end of the variation of the special symbol).

  In this embodiment, the determination process including whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect (holding change effect and / or background change effect) based on the reception of the prize-winning-judgment-result designation command is performed by a look-ahead effect determination. Although they are executed in the process (FIG. 28), those processes may be executed in the effect symbol changing process. For example, in the process of changing the effect symbol, a determination process including whether or not to perform a prefetch effect can be executed by including a process of monitoring the winning command storage area.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process (FIG. 39). In the effect design fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the fixed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the fixed command reception flag is set, the fixed command reception flag is set. Is reset (step S852), and control is performed to derive and display a stop symbol in accordance with the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (step S853). Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether the target variation flag is set (step S854). The target change flag is set in step S1806, S1816, or S1823 of the effect symbol change start process (FIGS. 41 to 43). If the target variation flag has not been set (N in step S854), the flow shifts to step S855.

  If the target change flag has been set (Y in step S854), that is, if the target change has been completed, the effect control CPU 101 resets the target change flag (step S854a), and sets the hold change flag. If set, the pending change flag is reset (step S854b), and if the background change flag is set, the background change flag is reset (step S854c). By resetting the hold change flag and the background change flag in this way, in the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28), a look-ahead effect (a hold change effect or a background change effect) is targeted for a variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the start winning. ) Can be determined (since N is determined in step S67101).

  Next, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S855). Whether it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result designation command stored in a display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it is also possible to confirm whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined based on the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (Y in step S855), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804 of the effect control process process (FIG. 39)). Update (step S856).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S855), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (the effect control process process (see FIG. The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S800) of step 39) (step S857).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the fluctuation (variable display) of the effect symbols on condition that the symbol confirmation designation command is received (see steps S851 and S853). However, when the fluctuation time timer based on the received fluctuation pattern command times out, control may be performed so as to end the fluctuation of the effect symbol without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variable display.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start 1 designation command has been received, and the jackpot start 2 designation command have been received). It is checked whether the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag shown or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received is set (step S871). . If any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags has been set (Y in step S871), control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872). . Also, the set flags (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag, or small hit / suddenly changing big hit start designation command reception flag) are reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S874). On the other hand, if the jackpot start designation command reception flag has not been set (N in step S871), the jackpot display process ends.

  It is to be noted that a small hit display process is provided separately from the big hit display process, and in the case of a small hit, for example, for a predetermined period (the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 second). For a sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the effect in the same manner as that at the time of the sudden change big hit may be performed.

  Further, in the case of a small hit or sudden change big hit, instead of executing the effect based on the reception of the small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command, the effect control CPU 101 performs, for example, a small hit / sudden sudden change big hit. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect indicating a small hit or a sudden change big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 switches, for each process time, process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden change big hit, and performs an effect according to the switched process data.

  In step S872, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a screen for notifying the start of the big hit game on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S806 of the effect control process process (FIG. 39)) in the effect control process process. In the big hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a big hit end effect timer is set (step S880). If the big hit end effect timer has been set (Y in step 880), the flow shifts to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer has not been set (N in step 880), the jackpot end designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received (the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag, the jackpot end 2 designation command reception) It is determined whether or not the flag, the small hit / suddenly variable big hit end designation command reception flag) is set (step S881). If the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 881), the big hit end effect processing is terminated. If the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (Y in step 881), the jackpot end designation command reception flag (jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag, jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag, or small hit / sudden sudden change The big hit end designation command reception flag) is reset (step S882), a value corresponding to the big hit end display time is set in the big hit end effect timer (step S883), and the big hit end screen (big hit game) is displayed on the effect display device 9. A control to display a screen for notifying the end is performed (step S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In step S885, the value of the big hit end effect timer is decremented by one. Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If the big hit end rendering time has not elapsed (N in step S886), the big hit end rendering process ends. If the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (Y in step S886), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800 in the effect control process process (FIG. 39)). ) Is updated (step S892).

  Next, the mode of the hold display in the hold change effect and the background mode in the background change effect will be specifically described. FIG. 50A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the mode of the hold display. As already described, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), in this embodiment, the hold display modes include (1) normal mode, (2) special mode, and (3) first special mode. Aspect, and (4) Four aspects of the second special aspect are provided. (1) The hold display in the normal mode is indicated by “○”. (2) The hold display of the special mode is displayed in a mode in which three lines are displayed above and below “o”, respectively. (3) The hold display of the first special mode is displayed in a mode in which “X” is included in “O”. (4) The hold display of the second special mode is displayed in a mode in which two “x” are included in “o”. It should be noted that various modes other than these can be adopted as the modes of the hold display.

  FIG. 50B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the background aspect in the background change effect. As already described, as shown in FIG. 50B, in this embodiment, the background modes in the background change effect are (1) the first background mode and (2) the second background mode. Two background aspects are provided. (1) In the first background mode, a background image indicating a fine weather scene, which is called a fine weather mode, is displayed in the performance symbol display area of the performance display device 9. (2) In the second background mode, a background image indicating a lightning strike scene, called a lightning strike mode, is displayed in the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9. These two background modes are displayed as variable background images of the effect symbols when the background change effect is being executed. It should be noted that, for these background aspects, various aspects other than these can be adopted.

  Next, a specific example of a look-ahead effect (preliminary effect) of the pending change effect and the background change effect will be described. Here, there are five concrete examples of (1) FIG. 51, (2) FIGS. 52 to 53, (3) FIGS. 54 to 55, (4) FIGS. 56 to 57, and (5) FIGS. An example will be described.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a case where a hold change effect based on a first look-ahead effect pattern is executed when it is determined that only a hold change effect is to be executed. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), in the effect display device 9, while the effect symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, two holding displays are displayed in the combined holding storage display unit 18 c in a normal mode (“○” in this example). If it is determined that the start winning is performed and only the holding change effect is executed (Y in Steps S67104 and S67105c of the look-ahead effect determination process) while being displayed, the holding change effect setting process (FIG. 30) is performed. The mode of the pending change effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the mode of the suggested effect are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined as the first look-ahead effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is set at the time of the start winning (shift number 0) or the shift mode. The number of times is determined as 1. In addition, the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the hold change effect based on the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) to be announced is not displayed in a special mode, It is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the display mode. The timing at which the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is the timing of the start winning or an arbitrary shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the time of the start winning (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. The third hold display is displayed in the hold storage display section 18c in the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). When the change timing is determined at the time of the start winning (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. The third hold display is displayed on the hold storage display section 18c in the second special mode (in this example, two "x" are included in "o").

  Further, even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not at the start winning timing (shift count 0) but at an arbitrary shift timing (shift count 1 in this case). In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (B3), at the timing of the starting prize, the third hold display is displayed in the combined hold storage display section 18c in a normal mode (“○” in this example). Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol stops (FIG. 51 (C)), the variation display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted, and The third and third hold indications are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the first effect mode, the suggestive effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, a display control in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed (FIG. 51 (D1)).

  When the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), the second hold display (FIG. 51) of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is performed at the timing of the shift. An effect (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the hold display newly displayed in (B3) is performed, and the hold display in which the black arrow is stuck is the first special mode. (In this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 51 (E2), the second hold display (FIG. 51) of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is performed at the shift timing. An effect (a suggestion effect of the first effect mode (success pattern)) is performed in which a black arrow is stuck on the hold display newly displayed in (B3), and the hold display in which the black arrow is stuck is the second special mode. (In this example, two "x" are included in "o") and displayed.

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the presentation mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined to be the second effect mode, the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, display control in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed (FIG. 51 (D2)).

  When the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 51 (E3), the second hold display (FIG. 51) of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is performed at the timing of the shift. An effect (a suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)) is performed in which a white arrow is stuck on the hold display newly displayed in (B3), and the hold display in which the white arrow is stuck is the first special mode. (In this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 51 (E4), the second hold display (FIG. 51) of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is performed at the timing of the shift. An effect (a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed in which a white arrow is stuck on the hold display newly displayed in (B3), and the hold display in which the white arrow is stuck is in the second special mode. (In this example, two "x" are included in "o") and displayed.

  As already described, in this embodiment, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the second effect mode as compared with the first effect mode. It is configured such that the ratio of the second special mode having a higher expectation of a big hit than the first special mode becomes higher. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestive effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when the black arrow flies and stabs the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode having a low degree of expectation is increased. high. That is, the ratio of transition from FIG. 51 (D1) to FIG. 51 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the effect mode of the suggestive effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, that is, when a white arrow flies and stabs the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the second special mode having a high degree of expectation is high. high. That is, the ratio of transition from FIG. 51 (D2) to FIG. 51 (E4) is high. With this configuration, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) is such that the arrow flies and sticks on the hold display, it is felt that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, and the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode. , That is, when the black arrow flies, it is possible to make the user feel that he wants to pass without sticking to the hold display (I want it to be a suggestive effect (passing pattern)).

  FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the pending change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern when it is determined that only the pending change effect is to be executed. As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the effect display device 9, while the effect symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, two hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18 c in a normal mode (“○” in this example). When it is determined that the start winning is performed and the holding change effect is to be executed (Y in steps S67104 and S67105c of the look-ahead effect determination process), the hold is made in the holding change effect setting process (FIG. 30). A change effect (prefetch effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and a suggestion mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the examples shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined as the second look-ahead effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is set as the number of shifts 1 or the number of shifts 2 Is determined. In addition, the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the hold change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, At an arbitrary shift timing, the display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be the second look-ahead effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), at the timing of the start winning, the third hold display is displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c in a special mode ( In this example, six lines are drawn outside of “○”.

  Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol stops (FIG. 52 (C)), the variation display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and 2 The third and third hold indications are shifted, respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggestive effect indicating that the suspended display changes. (Second production mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 52 (D)).

  Here, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. In the second hold display 18c (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 52 (B)), an effect (a suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a white arrow is inserted is performed. At the same time, the hold display with the white arrow stuck thereon is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, “X” is included in “O”) and displayed. When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 52 (E2), at the timing of the shift, the total suspension storage display section 18c The effect of the white arrow stuck in the second hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 52 (B)) (the suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second mode) is performed. Is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" are included in "o") and displayed.

  In addition, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 52 (E3), at the shift timing, a suggestion effect (a second effect mode) in which a white arrow passes without sticking to any hold display. (Passing pattern) is performed. The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 52 (E3) is performed when it is determined in the effect symbol change start process that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is to be executed in the second effect mode. As described above, in this embodiment, as the suggested effect, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) flies from the right side of the display area. This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when an arrow is stabbed in the hold display (when a suggestive effect (success pattern) is performed), the display mode changes, and the arrow pierces any of the hold displays. The display mode does not change when the vehicle passes without passing (when a suggestion effect (passing pattern) is performed).

  Thereafter, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 53 (F)), and when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased and 2 The first hold indication is shifted. At this time, a display control in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggestive effect indicating that the suspended display changes (FIG. 53 (G)). ).

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 53 (H1), the total suspension storage display section 18c is shifted at the timing of the shift. (A suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck in the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 52 (B)). Is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. (A suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)) in which the black arrow is stuck in the first hold display (corresponding to the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 52 (B)). Is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" are included in "o") and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in this embodiment, in the hold change effect based on the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold memory) to be notified is once displayed in a special mode. Instead, it is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the timing of the start winning. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the holding change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern, the holding display corresponding to the variable display (holding storage) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning. Then, the image is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode at an arbitrary shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a plurality of timings. When the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the first special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. Since the display is changed to the two special modes, the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 realizes the display result and the fluctuation of the fluctuation display at the time of the start prize, which are realized by executing the prize-winning effect processing (see FIG. 16) and the like. There is provided a judging means for judging a pattern. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 is realized by executing a pre-reading effect determination process (see FIG. 28), an effect symbol change start process (see FIG. 41), etc. Is provided in the first special mode or the second special mode to display a hold display corresponding to the above (holding storage in the total holding storage display unit 18c). The effect execution means can change the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (eg, timing of starting winning, shift timing, etc.), and display the hold display in the special mode. When the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started, the display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. It is configured to With such a configuration, the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a plurality of timings. When the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment. it can.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured to execute a look-ahead effect determination process (see FIG. 28), an effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41), and the like, and a display mode of a hold display. There is provided a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect (suggestion effect (success pattern) and a suggestion effect (passing pattern)) for suggesting whether or not is changed. Then, the suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the suspended display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect is executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be increased and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means corresponds to the hold storage which is determined at a higher rate when the display result is determined to be a big hit by the determination means than when it is determined that the big result is not a big hit. The hold display is displayed in the second special mode. The effect execution means may display the hold display in a special mode when performing the hold change effect in the second look-ahead effect pattern in which the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. Instead, the hold display is configured to be displayed in the second special mode at a higher rate than when performing the hold change effect in the first look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the rate of display in the second special mode having a high degree of expectation of a big hit is increased, so that the sense of expectation can be increased, Amusement in entertainment can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined that the holding change effect is to be executed in the second look-ahead effect pattern) and the change timing is determined to be a winning time (the number of fluctuations is 0). The hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning prize, and the first timing (for example, the shift of the first hold display after the start winning prize) until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. Is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, a timing at which the second hold display is shifted after the start winning). It is possible to change and display the mode. The effect execution means changes the hold display from the special mode at the first timing or the second timing at different rates depending on whether the determination result is determined to be a big hit or when the determination result is not a big hit. The first special mode or the second special mode is changed and displayed. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to notice at which timing the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured to execute a process of setting a pre-reading effect restriction flag. When the hold display is displayed in a special mode, a special hold display is newly added. It is configured to include a restriction unit that restricts display in an aspect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from being confused as to which attention should be paid when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means stores the hold memory, which is a determination target at a higher rate, when the display result is determined to be a big hit than when it is determined not to be a big hit by the determination means. The corresponding hold display is displayed in the second special mode. In addition, the effect execution means performs the first effect (for example, a black arrow) when performing the on-hold change effect in the first look-ahead effect pattern in which the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. Is performed, and a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode in which the flag flies and is stuck on the hold display is performed, and when the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode for display, (For example, a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode in which a white arrow flies and sticks on the hold display), and changes the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. There are times when it is changed and displayed. The effect execution means is configured to change the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at a different ratio between when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed, and display the same. ing. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first effect and the second effect is performed, and to improve the game entertainment. it can.

  FIGS. 54 and 55 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples when a background change effect is further executed after the hold change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern is executed. In FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, it is determined that only the background change effect is executed after the hold change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern is executed based on the determination that only the hold change effect is executed. A specific example in which a background change effect is executed based on the fact, that is, after a hold change effect is executed for one hold storage (variable display), a hold different from the one hold storage (variable display) is performed. A specific example in which a background change effect is executed for storage (variable display) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (1), in the effect display device 9, when the effect symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner and two hold displays are displayed in the normal mode on the combined hold storage display section 18c, a new state is displayed. It is assumed that a start winning is performed and the result of the start winning is “non-reach out”. In the prefetching effect determination process at the time of the start winning, when it is determined that only the pending change effect is to be executed (Y in steps S67104 and S67105c of the prefetching effect determination process (FIG. 28)), the pending change effect setting process (prefetching) In step S67105d of the effect determination process (FIG. 28) and the hold change effect setting process of FIG. 30), the mode of the hold change effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the mode of the suggestion effect are determined. A new hold display is displayed accordingly. In the example shown in FIG. 54, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined as the second look-ahead effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, and the change timing is determined as the number of shifts 1. In addition, the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode.

  As described above, since the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be the second look-ahead effect pattern here, as shown in FIG. The display is displayed in a special manner. Thereby, the player can recognize the hold display (variable display) to be the target of the hold change effect. Since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is "non-reach loss", as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the fluctuation display of the effect symbol stops at "528" which is the loss symbol. Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted, and the second and third hold displays are respectively the first hold display. And the second one (FIG. 54 (4)). Here, since the change timing of the hold change effect is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode is the first effect mode, the display mode of the hold display changes at this timing when the first hold display shift is performed. As a suggestive effect that suggests that a black arrow will fly from the right side of the display area of the effect display device 9 (FIG. 54 (4)). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (5), an effect is performed in which a black arrow is inserted in the hold display displayed in the second special mode of the combined hold storage display unit 18c. An effect of changing the display mode to the first special mode is performed. And since this fluctuation display is "non-reach loss", as shown in FIG. 54 (6), the fluctuation display of the effect symbol stops at "415" which is the loss symbol.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second hold display displayed in the first special mode becomes 1 The third shift is performed (FIG. 54 (7)). Here, a new start winning is performed, and it is assumed that "reach out of reach" is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning. At this time, the hold change effect is being executed, and the hold change flag is set. (Since the hold change flag is set in step S67117 of the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30)), the pre-reading effect determination process (FIG. 28) despite the determination of the variable display pattern accompanied by the reach. In step S67101, the result is Y, and the look-ahead effect (pending change effect or background change effect) is not executed. Accordingly, in response to this new start winning prize, as shown in FIG. 54 (8), a new hold display is displayed in the second mode of the combined hold storage display section 18c in a normal manner (prefetch effect determination). Step S67105g of the process (FIG. 28)). Since the change display during the change is "non-reach loss", as shown in FIG. 54 (9), the change display of the effect symbol is stopped at "249" which is the loss symbol.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display displayed in the first special mode is deleted, and the second hold display is displayed. The first shift is performed (FIG. 54 (10)). Since the variation display started here is the variation display that is the target (target) of the pending change effect, the target variation flag is set in step S1806 of the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 41). Here, since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is "non-reach loss", as shown in FIG. 54 (11), the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is stopped at the loss symbol "381". Here, the set target change flag and the hold change flag that have been set are reset (steps S854a and S854b in the effect symbol change stop process (FIG. 47)). That is, it is possible to execute the background change effect with the end of the variable display of the target.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted, and all the hold displays are deleted (FIG. 54 (12)). ). Here, when three new start winnings are performed, a winning effect process (step S1217 or S1228 of the starting-port switch passing process (FIG. 14), see FIG. 16) is executed for each start winning. You. Here, the first starting prize is “non-reach out”, the second starting prize is “super reach jackpot” accompanied by a background change effect of the second background mode (lightning mode), and the third starting prize is "Non-reach loss" is determined. Specifically, for the second start winning prize, after the prize-winning effect process (FIG. 16) determines that the big hit is a big hit (step S220), the big hit type is “probably variable big hit” and the variation pattern is “super”. Reach big hit "(steps S227 and S229), and it is decided to execute only the background change effect in the prefetch effect effect determination process (steps S671 and FIG. 28) of the command analysis process (FIGS. 26 and 27). (N in steps S67104 and S67105c), the background mode is determined to be the second background mode (lightning strike mode) in the background change effect setting process (step S67105e, FIG. 35) (step S67206). Here, the background change flag is set (step S67217 in the background change effect setting process (FIG. 30)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), three new suspension displays are displayed in the normal mode on the total suspension storage display unit 18c.

  Here, since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is “out of reach”, the left and right symbols of the effect symbol stop at “5” as shown in FIG. 54 (14), and the central symbol continues to change. After the reach effect has been executed, as shown in FIG. 54 (15), the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped at "565" which is a lost symbol.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second and third hold displays are changed to the first and third hold displays, respectively. The second shift is performed (FIG. 55 (16)). Further, the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is determined as the target (target) of the background change effect in the second background mode (lightning strike mode), and only the background change flag is set ( (Step S1813 of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41) is determined to be Y), the process table with the background change effect of the second background mode is selected (step S1817), and the effect along the process table is executed. (Step S1831). Thus, as shown in FIG. 55 (16), the variable display with the background change effect in the second background mode (lightning strike mode) is started. When the background change effect is executed in this way, the player must grasp which of the two hold displays (two hold memories) is the target (target) in which the background change effect is being executed. Can not.

  Next, as described above, since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is determined to be “non-reach loss”, “643” which is a loss symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 (FIG. 55 (17)). Then, the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second hold display is shifted to the first (FIG. 55). (18)). The variable display started here is a variable display that is a target of the background change effect. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1816 and S1817 in FIG. The background mode determined when it is determined to execute the background change effect (the background mode determined in step S67206 in FIG. 35). And since the fluctuation display started here is the fluctuation pattern of "super reach big hit" as described above, the left and right symbols of the effect symbol stop at "7" as shown in FIG. A reach effect in which the central symbol continues to fluctuate is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (20), a battle effect as a super-reach effect is executed. At this time, the variable display is displayed on the lower right of the effect display device 9. Then, since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is determined to be “probable change big hit”, a battle effect in which the ally character wins is executed (FIGS. 55 (21) to 55 (22)), and finally “777”, which is a probability change big hit symbol, is derived and displayed (FIG. 55 (23)).

  FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples when a hold change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern is executed after the background change effect is executed. In FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, after the background change effect is executed based on the decision to execute only the background change effect, the second change is performed based on the decision to execute only the hold change effect. A specific example in which a hold change effect based on a look-ahead effect pattern is executed, that is, after a background change effect is executed for one hold memory (variable display), a hold different from the one hold memory (variable display) is performed. A specific example in which a hold change effect is executed for storage (variable display) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (51), in the effect display device 9, when one effect display is displayed in the normal mode on the combined hold storage display unit 18c while the effect symbols are being changed and displayed. Two new start winnings are performed, the first start winning is determined to be "non-reach out", and a background change effect of the first background mode (fine weather mode) is executed for the second start winning. Is decided. Specifically, for the second start winning, after a determination is made in the winning effect processing (FIG. 16), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach loss" (step S229), and thereafter In the pre-reading effect determination process (steps S671 and FIG. 28) of the command analysis process (FIGS. 26 and 27), it is determined to execute only the background change effect (N in steps S67104 and S67105c), and the background change effect setting process In step S67105e (FIG. 35), the background mode is determined to be the first background mode (sunny mode) (step S67206). Here, the background change flag is set (step S67217 in the background change effect setting process (FIG. 30)). As a result, the second and third hold displays are displayed in the normal mode on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (FIG. 56 (52)). Since the change display during the change is "non-reach loss", as shown in FIG. 56 (53), the change display of the effect symbol is stopped at "528" which is the loss symbol.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted, and the second and third hold displays are changed to the first and third hold displays, respectively. The second shift is performed (FIG. 56 (54)). Further, the variable display corresponding to the third hold display is determined to accompany the background change effect of the first background mode (fine weather mode), and only the background change flag is set (effect symbol). (Step S1813 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 41) determines Y), the process table with the background change effect of the first background mode is selected (step S1817), and the effect according to the process table is executed (step S1817). S1821). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56 (54), the variable display with the background change effect in the first background mode (fine weather mode) is started. When the background change effect is executed in this way, the player must grasp which of the two hold displays (two hold memories) is the target (target) in which the background change effect is being executed. Can not.

  Since the variable display during the change is determined to be "non-reach loss", "415", which is a lost symbol, is stopped in the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9 (FIG. 56 (55)). ). Next, the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second hold display is shifted to the first (FIG. 56). (56)).

  Here, a new start winning is performed, and it is assumed that “reach out of reach” is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning. At this time, the background change effect is being performed, and the background change flag is set. (Since the background change flag has been set in step S67217 of the background change effect setting process (FIG. 35)), this start winning prize is not changed even though it is determined to be a variable display pattern with reach. An effect or a background change effect is not executed (since Y is determined in step S67101 of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28)). Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (57), a new hold display is displayed in the second mode of the total hold storage display section 18c as a hold display corresponding to this new start winning in a normal mode. Since the variable display during the change is determined to be “non-reach loss”, “249” which is a loss symbol is stopped in the effect symbol display area (FIG. 56 (58)).

  Next, the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted, and the second hold display is shifted to the first (FIG. 56). (59)). The variable display started here is a variable display that is a target of the background change effect. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1816 and S1817 in FIG. The background mode determined when it is determined to execute the background change effect (the background mode determined in step S67206 in FIG. 35). Since the change display started here is the change display of the target of the background change effect, the target change flag is set here (step S1816 of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41)).

  Next, since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is “non-reach loss”, as shown in FIG. 56 (60), the loss symbol “381” is stopped in the effect symbol display area. Here, in the effect design fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 47), since the target fluctuation flag is set, it is determined as Y in step S854, and the target fluctuation flag is reset (step S854a) and the background change flag is reset (step S854a). S854c) is performed. That is, it is possible to execute the pending change effect with the end of the variable display of the target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (61), the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, and the first hold display is deleted. Here, two new start winnings are performed, and a winning effect process (step S1217 or S1228 of the starting-port switch passing process (FIG. 14), see FIG. 16) is executed for each start winning. Here, the first start winning is determined to be "non-reach out" and the second start winning is determined to be "super-reach big hit" accompanied by a holding change effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern. That is, for the second start winning, after the winning effect is determined in the winning effect process (FIG. 16) (step S220), the big hit type is "probable big hit" and the variation pattern is "super reach big hit". It is determined (steps S227 and S229), and it is determined to execute the pending change effect in the prefetching effect determination process (steps S671 and FIG. 28) of the subsequent command analysis process (FIGS. 26 and 27) (steps S67104 and step S67104). (Y in S67105c), in the hold change effect setting process (FIG. 30), the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode (step S67106), and the look-ahead effect pattern of the hold change effect is determined to be the second look-ahead effect pattern (step S67106). In step S67107, the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 (step S67108). The effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the second effect mode. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56 (62), the first new hold display is displayed in the normal mode on the combined hold storage display unit 18c, and the second new hold display is displayed in the special mode. Is displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize the hold display (variable display) to be the target of the hold change effect.

  Here, since the fluctuation display during the fluctuation is "reach out of reach", as shown in FIG. 56 (63), the left and right symbols of the effect symbol stop at "5" and the central symbol continues to change. After the reach effect has been executed, as shown in FIG. 56 (64), the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped at "565" which is a lost symbol.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted, and the hold display displayed in the second special mode becomes the first. It is shifted (FIG. 56 (65)). Here, as described above, the change timing of the hold change effect is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode is the second effect mode. Therefore, at this timing when the first hold display shift is performed, As a suggestion effect indicating that the display mode changes, display control in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area of the effect display device 9 is performed. (FIG. 56 (65)). Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (66), an effect is performed in which a white arrow is inserted into the hold display displayed in the first special mode of the combined hold storage display unit 18c. An effect of changing the display mode to the second special mode is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (67), the variation display of the effect symbol stops at "643" which is a lost symbol.

  Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, whereby all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display section 18c are erased. (FIG. 57 (68)). Since this fluctuation display is the target (target) of the pending change effect, the target change flag is set (step S1806 of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 41)). Since the fluctuation display started here is “super reach big hit” as described above, first, the left and right symbols of the effect symbol stop at “7” as shown in FIG. Is performed, the reach effect is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (70), a battle effect as a super-reach effect is executed. At this time, the variable display is displayed on the lower right of the effect display device 9. Since it is determined to be "probably big hit" here, a battle effect in which the ally character wins is executed (FIGS. 57 (71) to 57 (72)), and finally, the probable big hit symbol " 777 "is derived and displayed (FIG. 57 (73)). Then, the target change flag and the hold change effect flag are reset (steps S854a and S854b of the effect symbol change stop process (FIG. 47)).

  FIGS. 58 and 59 show the first look-ahead after the background change effect has been executed based on the fact that it has been determined in the start winning prize that both the hold change effect and the background change effect have been executed. A specific example in which the hold change effect based on the effect pattern is executed, that is, after the background change effect is executed for one hold memory (variable display), the hold memory common to the one hold memory (variable display) is used. A specific example in which a hold change effect is executed for (variable display) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (81), in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is assumed that the three reserved displays are displayed in the normal mode. At this time, one new starting prize is performed, and the starting prize is determined to be "super reach big hit" (step S229), and the look-ahead effect determination processing (step S671) of the subsequent command analysis processing (FIGS. 26 and 27). , FIG. 28), it is assumed that both the hold change effect and the background change effect are to be performed for the hold memory (variable display) corresponding to the start winning (Y in steps S67104 and S67105b). ).

  Then, in the double change effect setting process (step S67105f, FIG. 36), the background mode is determined to be the second background mode (lightning mode) (step S67306), and the final display mode is set to the second special mode. (Step S67308), and the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 3 (step S67309). The effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the second effect mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (82), the fourth new hold display (hold display corresponding to the hold storage that is the target of the double change effect) is normally displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c. It is displayed in a manner (step S67311). At this time, the value of the effect total pending storage number counter is 4.

  Here, (1) the background mode is determined according to the result of the winning determination (“losing”, “normal big hit or probable big hit”, “sudden probable big hit or small hit”) based on the background mode determination table of FIG. Is done. In addition, (2) the final display mode is determined based on the double-change final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 37 by the prize-winning determination results (“out”, “normal big hit or probable big hit”, “sudden probable big hit or small hit”), It is determined according to the determined background mode (“first background mode”, “second background mode”). Here, it is set so that when the second background mode is determined, the second special mode is determined at a higher rate than when the first background mode is determined. Further, (3) the change timing is determined according to the total number of pending storages in the change timing determination table for double change in FIG. Here, the change timing (the number of shifts) is set to be larger as the total number of suspended storages is larger. In addition, the presentation mode of the (4) suggestive effect (success pattern) is determined at the time of prize (“outside”, “normal big hit or probable big hit”, “sudden probable big hit or small hit”) according to the suggestive effect mode determination table of FIG. Is determined according to.

  Since the change display during the change is "non-reach loss", as shown in FIG. 58 (83), the change display of the effect symbol is stopped at "528" which is the loss symbol. Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second to fourth hold displays are respectively the first to fourth hold displays. The third shift is performed (FIG. 58 (84)). Here, both the hold change flag and the background change flag are set (determined as Y in step S1820 of the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 42)), and the display is not a variation display of the target of the double change effect. (N in step S1822) Since the value of the shift number counter is larger than 0 (here, it is 3 and thus determined as Y in step S1824), the value of the shift number counter is subtracted (subtracted in step S1825 to 2). If the value of the shift counter after the subtraction is not 0 (N in step S1826), steps S1827 and S1828 at the time of setting the hold change flag are executed. At this time, the value of the effect summation pending storage number counter is 3 (subtracted in step S1821).

  Here, since the hold change flag is set, the first effect mode (passing pattern) or the second effect as the effect mode of the suggested effect is the ratio at the time of setting the hold change flag shown in FIG. One of the modes (passing patterns) is determined, and in this example, it is assumed that the first effect mode (passing pattern) is determined. In addition, since the background mode flag is set, in step S1828, the process table with the determined background change effect of the second background mode and the suggested effect of the first effect mode (passing pattern) is selected. An effect along the table is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (84), the variable display with the background change effect of the second background mode (lightning strike mode) is started, and further, the first effect mode in which black arrows fly from the right side of the screen. (Passing pattern) is suggested. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (85), since it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold display (since the shift number counter is not 0 and a suggestion effect of the passing pattern is selected), the flying is performed. The resulting black arrow does not stab any hold display, and the display mode of the hold display does not change. Therefore, the player cannot know which of the three holding displays (three holding memories) is executing the background change effect.

  Since the change display during the change is “non-reach loss”, as shown in FIG. 58 (86), the change display of the effect symbol is stopped at “415” which is the loss symbol. Next, the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second and third hold displays are changed to the first and third hold displays, respectively. The second shift is performed (FIG. 58 (87)). Here, both the hold change flag and the background change flag are set (determined as Y in step S1820 of the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 42)), and the display is not a variation display of the target of the double change effect. (N in step S1822) Since the value of the shift number counter is larger than 0 (here, it is 2 and thus determined to be Y in step S1824), the value of the shift number counter is subtracted (subtracted to 1 in step S1825 to become 1). If the value of the shift counter after the subtraction is not 0 (N in step S1826), steps S1827 and S1828 at the time of setting the hold change flag are executed. At this time, the value of the effect summation pending storage number counter is 2 (subtracted in step S1821).

  Here, since the hold change flag is set, the first effect mode (passing pattern) or the second effect as the effect mode of the suggested effect is the ratio at the time of setting the hold change flag shown in FIG. One of the modes (passing patterns) is determined, and in this example, it is assumed that the second effect mode (passing pattern) is determined. In addition, since the background mode flag is set, in step S1828, the process table with the determined background change effect of the second background mode and the suggested effect of the second effect mode (passing pattern) is selected. An effect along the table is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (87), the variable display with the background change effect in the second background mode (lightning mode) is started, and further, the second effect mode in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the screen. (Passing pattern) is suggested. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (88), since it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold display (since the shift number counter is not 0 and the suggestion effect of the passing pattern is selected), the flight is skipped. The resulting white arrow does not stick in any of the hold displays, and the display mode of the hold display does not change. Therefore, the player cannot grasp which of the two hold displays (two hold memories) is the target (target) and the background change effect is being executed.

  Since the change display during the change is “non-reach loss”, as shown in FIG. 58 (89), the change display of the effect symbol is stopped at “249” which is the loss symbol. Next, the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and the second hold display is shifted to the first (FIG. 58 (90)). Here, both the hold change flag and the background change flag are set (determined as Y in step S1820 of the effect design variation start process (FIG. 42)), and the display is not a variation display of the target of the double change effect. (N in step S1822) Since the value of the shift number counter is larger than 0 (here, it is 1 and thus determined as Y in step S1824), the value of the shift number counter is subtracted (subtracted to 0 in step S1825). ), When the value of the shift counter after the subtraction becomes 0 (Y in step S1826), step S1829 is executed. At this time, the value of the effect summation pending storage number counter is 1 (subtracted in step S1821).

  Thereby, the process table corresponding to the background mode of the background change effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect, and the final display mode of the hold change effect determined at the time of the start winning is selected (step S1829). . As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (90), the variation display of the effect symbol is performed on the background image of the second background mode (lightning strike mode), and the second effect mode (white arrow) is flying from the right side of the screen. (Success pattern). Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (91), since the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display has been changed (because the shift number counter has become 0 and a successful pattern suggestion effect has been executed), the flight has flown. The white arrow is stuck in the hold display of the target (the hold display corresponding to the value (here, 1) indicated by the effect total storage storage counter), and the display mode of the hold display changes to the second special mode. Therefore, the player can understand that the background change effect is being executed with the first hold display as the target (target).

  Since the change display during the change is “non-reach loss”, as shown in FIG. 58 (92), the change display of the effect symbol is stopped at “381” which is the loss symbol. Next, when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, whereby all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display section 18c are erased. It is in the state of being performed (FIG. 58 (93)). The variation display started here is a variation display that is the target of the pending change effect and the background change effect (double change effect), and the target change flag is set (in the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 42)). Step S1823). Also, in this embodiment, as shown in steps S1823 and S1830 in FIG. 42, when it is determined that the background mode in the variable display of the target also executes the pending change effect and the background change effect (double change effect). (The background mode determined in step S67306 of FIG. 36).

  In addition, since the fluctuation display started here is “super reach big hit” as described above, first, the left and right symbols of the effect symbol stop at “7” as shown in FIG. The reach effect in which the symbol of の continues to change is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (95), a battle effect as a super reach effect is executed. At this time, the variable display is displayed on the lower right of the effect display device 9. Then, since it is determined to be a "probably big hit", a battle effect in which the ally character wins is executed (FIGS. 59 (96) to 59 (97)), and finally a "probably big hit" symbol is obtained. 777 "is derived and displayed (FIG. 59 (98)). Then, the target change flag, the hold change effect flag, and the background change flag are reset (steps S854a, S854b, and S854c of the effect symbol change stop process (FIG. 47)).

  The configuration and operation according to the first embodiment of the present invention have been specifically described above. The gaming machine of this embodiment has the following features due to the configuration and operation described above.

(A) In this embodiment, when the first notice effect (hold change effect) is executed for one variable display, the first display effect (hold change effect) is executed for the variable display (variable display for the hold change effect). 2 When the advance notice effect (background change effect) is not executed, or when the first notice effect (hold change effect) is executed for one variable display, the variable display (variable display targeted for the hold change effect) The second notice effect (background change effect) is executed at a lower rate than when the first notice effect (pending change effect) is not executed. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when both the hold change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) are executed for one hold memory, the background image is changed to the first background mode or the second background. Before changing to the mode, the display mode of the hold display is prevented from changing to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the hold change effect and the background change effect are targeted for one variable display. When it is determined that both effects are to be executed, the execution of the pending change effect after the execution of the background change effect is restricted. Here, in the background change effect (second notice effect), the variable display targeted for the notice effect is intended to be improved even though the variable display targeted for the notice effect is not intended to be clarified. If the background change effect (the second notice effect) is executed after the hold change effect (the first notice effect) in which is obvious, not only the entertainment change by the background change effect (the second notice effect) cannot be expected, but also the interest of the game. May be reduced. In this embodiment, when such a change-on-hold effect (the first announcement effect) is executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the game due to the further execution of the background-change effect (the second announcement effect). It is possible to improve the fun of the notice production on the machine.

(B) In this embodiment, when the first notice effect (hold change effect) is executed for one variable display, the variable display (variable display targeted for the hold change effect) When the second preview effect (background change effect) is not executed for a different variable display, or when the first advance effect (hold change effect) is executed for one variable display, the variable display (hold change effect) is executed. The second notice effect (background change effect) is executed at a lower rate than when the first notice effect (pending change effect) is not executed for the variable display different from the target variable display). " I have. That is, in the above embodiment, if the hold change flag is set (Y in S67101), it is not determined that the background change effect and the double change effect are to be executed, so that the hold change effect is executed after the hold change effect is executed. The execution of the background change effect on a variable display different from the target of the change effect is restricted. As described above, after the first preview effect is executed for one variable display, the execution of the second advance effect for the variable display different from the variable display is restricted, so that a plurality of different display operations are performed. The confusion of the player due to the execution of the first advance effect and the second advance effect for the variable display can be suppressed.

(C) Further, in this embodiment, a background change effect (second notice effect) that aims to improve the interest by not intentionally clarifying the variable display to be the notice effect is targeted for the notice effect. Since it does not start at the same time as the hold change effect (the first notice effect) that attempts to clarify the variable display and enhance the interest ((1) the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the background change effect and the When performing a pending change effect, based on the change timing determination table for double change, a part that determines that the pending change effect is executed at a timing later than the timing at which the background change effect is started, and (2) If the hold control flag has been set by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the prefetch effect determination process (Y in S67101) A portion in which the background change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display (S67105e and S67105f are not executed), and (3) the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the prefetch effect. In the process, if the background change flag is set (Y in S67101), the holding change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display (S67105d and S67105f are not executed). Part), it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to the execution of the background change effect (second notice effect) in a situation where the player is less interested, and to improve the interest in the notice effect in the gaming machine. Specifically, the display mode of the hold display after the shift is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at the shift timing of the hold display (that is, the timing at which the variation display of the effect symbol is started), and the variable display is performed. By changing the background image in the first background mode or the second background mode, the interest of the background change effect is not spoiled.

(D) Further, in this embodiment, after a change display effect (first preview effect) for clarifying a variable display that is a target of the preview effect and improving the interest is executed, the target of the preview effect is set. Since the variable change display is not intentionally clarified, the execution of the background change effect (the second notice effect) for improving the interest is regulated. ((1) The effect control microcomputer 100 has one When performing the background change effect and the hold change effect for the hold memory, the hold change effect is executed at a timing later than the timing at which the background change effect is started, based on the double change change timing determination table. And (2) when the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the pending change flag has been set in the prefetch effect determination process. (Y in S67101), the background change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display (S67105e and S67105f are not executed). Is restricted after the execution of the background change effect is executed), the background change effect is started after the hold change effect is started), and the player is interested. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to the execution of the background change effect (second notice effect) in a difficult situation, and to improve the interest in the notice effect in the gaming machine.

(E) Further, in this embodiment, after the hold change effect (first notice effect) for clarifying the variable display to be the target of the notice effect and improving the interest is started, the hold change effect is started. Until the variable display targeted for the (first notice production) ends, the variable display targeted for the notice production is intentionally not clarified to improve the interest (second notice production). (In the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28), if the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control CPU 101) sets the hold change flag (Y in S67101)). , The background change effect is not executed (S67105e and S67105f are not executed), and the change is not held until the change display of the target of the hold change effect ends. Since the change flag is set (S854b), the pending change effect is started, and the background change effect is restricted from starting until the variable display targeted for the pending change effect ends.) It is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of the background change effect (the second notice effect) in a situation where the player is less interested, and to improve the interest of the notice effect in the gaming machine. Specifically, when the variable display serving as the target of the pending change effect is being executed, the state of the variable display (for example, whether or not a super reach is reached) and the display result (whether or not a big hit is reached) Since the player is interested, he / she starts the background change effect while the variable display which is the target of the hold change effect is being executed, which detracts from the interest of the background change effect. Therefore, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the background change effect even when the change display serving as the target of the hold change effect is being executed.

(F) Further, in this embodiment, when the second notice effect (background change effect) is executed for one variable display, the variable display (variable display targeted for the background change effect) When the first preview effect (pending change effect) is not executed for a different variable display, or when the second advance effect (background change effect) is executed for one variable display, the variable display (background change effect) is performed. The first notice effect (hold change effect) is executed at a lower rate than when the second notice effect (background change effect) is not executed for the variable display different from the target variable display). " I have. That is, in the above embodiment, when the background change flag is set (Y in S67101), it is not determined that the hold change effect and the double change effect are to be executed. The execution of the pending change effect for a variable display different from the change effect target is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of the first preview effect on a variable display different from the variable display after the second preview effect is performed on one variable display, a plurality of different The confusion of the player due to the execution of the second advance effect and the first advance effect for the variable display can be suppressed.

(G) Further, in this embodiment, the variable display which is a target of the notice effect is clarified, and the change-on-hold effect (the first notice effect) for improving the interest is changed. Since it does not start at the same time as the background change effect (the second notice effect) which aims to enhance the interest by not clarifying it, ((1) the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the background change effect and the When performing a pending change effect, based on the change timing determination table for double change, a part that determines that the pending change effect is executed at a timing later than the timing at which the background change effect is started, and (2) If the hold control flag has been set by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the prefetch effect determination process (Y in S67101) A portion in which the background change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display (S67105e and S67105f are not executed), and (3) the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the prefetch effect. In the process, if the background change flag is set (Y in S67101), the holding change effect is not executed for the variable display different from the corresponding variable display (S67105d and S67105f are not executed). Part), it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to the execution of the background change effect (second notice effect) in a situation where the player is less interested, and to improve the interest in the notice effect in the gaming machine. Specifically, the display mode of the hold display after the shift is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at the shift timing of the hold display (that is, the timing at which the variation display of the effect symbol is started), and the variable display is performed. Is prohibited from changing to the first background mode or the second background mode, so that the interest of the background change effect is not spoiled.

(H) Further, in this embodiment, after the background change effect (the second notice effect) is performed to improve the interest by not intentionally clarifying the variable display to be the object of the notice effect, the background is changed. For the variable display different from the target of the change effect, the execution of the pending change effect (first notification effect) for clarifying the variable display to be the target of the notice effect and improving the interest is regulated. Therefore, in the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28), if the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control CPU 101) sets the background change flag (Y in S67101), it does not execute the hold change effect (S67105d). And S67105f are not executed), thereby restricting the start of the pending change effect after the background change effect is started. By restricting the execution of the first preview effect on a variable display different from the variable display after the second preview effect on the one variable display is executed, a plurality of different variable displays can be displayed. The confusion of the player due to the execution of the second advance effect and the first advance effect can be suppressed.

(I) Further, in this embodiment, after the background change effect (the second notice effect), which aims to enhance the interest by not intentionally clarifying the variable display to be the object of the notice effect, the second display effect is started. Until the variable display targeted for the background change effect (the second notice effect) ends, the variable display targeted for the notice effect is clarified for a variable display different from the target for the background change effect. Since the execution of the pending change effect (first notice effect) for improving the performance is restricted (in the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 28), the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control CPU 101) If the background change flag has been set (Y in S67101), the pending change effect is not executed (S67105d and S67105f are not executed). The background change flag is set until the variable display of the target of the change effect ends (S854c), so that the background change effect is started, and the hold change is performed until the variable display targeted for the background change effect ends. After the second notice effect is executed for one variable display, the first notice effect is executed for the variable display different from the variable display. , The confusion of the player due to the execution of the second advance effect and the first advance effect for a plurality of different variable displays can be suppressed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the background image in the variable display that is the target of the background change effect is also changed to the first background mode or the second background mode in the background change effect (when the background change effect is executed, in step S67104). Because the background change effect setting process (the background mode determined in the step S67206) is performed when the determination is made, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the variable display being executed is the target of the background change effect. In such a situation, when the variable display that is the target of the background change effect is being executed, the hold change that targets the variable display (hold storage) that is different from the target of the background change effect is performed. Executing the effect may confuse the player. Therefore, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the hold change effect even when the change display serving as the target of the background change effect is being executed.

(J) Also, in this embodiment, the rate at which the first advance effect is executed when the second advance effect is executed with respect to one hold memory (the ratio determined to execute the double change effect / [Ratio determined to execute double change effect + Ratio determined to execute only background change effect]) is the first advance effect when the second advance effect is not executed for one hold memory. Is set higher than the execution ratio (the ratio determined to execute only the pending change effect) (the look-ahead effect execution determination table in FIG. 29). According to this, after the background change effect in which the player cannot easily recognize the hold memory to be the target of the notice effect for the one hold memory is executed, the notice effect is applied to the one hold memory. The frequency of execution of the holding change effect that allows the player to recognize the holding memory is increased. Thereby, in response to the question “Which on-hold display (holding memory) is the target of the notice effect” presented by executing the background change effect, the hold change effect is executed thereafter. , The answer to the question is presented (the display mode of the hold display targeted for the notice effect is changed to a special mode), so that the notice effect of both the background change effect and the hold change effect is produced. It is possible to appropriately improve the interest without impairing the characteristics of.

(K) Also, in this embodiment, the rate at which the first advance effect is executed when the second advance effect is executed for one hold memory (the ratio at which the double change effect is determined to be executed / [Ratio determined to execute double change effect + Ratio determined to execute only background change effect]) is that the first advance effect is executed when the second advance effect is executed for one hold memory. It is set higher than the ratio not executed (the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect / [the ratio determined to execute the double change effect + the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect]) ( The look-ahead effect execution determination table in FIG. 29). According to this, after the background change effect in which the player cannot easily recognize the hold memory to be the target of the notice effect for the one hold memory is executed, the notice effect is applied to the one hold memory. The frequency of execution of the holding change effect that allows the player to recognize the holding memory is increased. Thereby, in response to the question “Which on-hold display (holding memory) is the target of the notice effect” presented by executing the background change effect, the hold change effect is executed thereafter. , The answer to the question is presented (the display mode of the hold display targeted for the notice effect is changed to a special mode), so that the notice effect of both the background change effect and the hold change effect is produced. It is possible to appropriately improve the interest without impairing the characteristics of.

(L) Further, in this embodiment, as the hold change effect, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the first special mode (low expectation) and the second change mode (high expectation). A pending change effect exists, and as the background change effect, a background change effect that changes the mode of the background image to a first background mode (low expectation) and a background change effect that changes to a second background mode (high expectation) ) And exists. Then, in the case of performing both the holding change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) for one hold memory, first, the background mode in the background change effect executed first is determined. (Step S67306 in FIG. 36) Then, based on the double change final display mode determination table (FIG. 37), the final display mode of the hold display is determined according to the previously determined background mode (Step S67308). . According to this, the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect is determined according to the background mode of the background change effect executed earlier, so that the hold change effect is executed after the execution of the background change effect. It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest in the game.

(M) Further, in this embodiment, in the case of performing both the hold change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) for one hold memory, the second background mode is determined. In this case, the final display mode of the hold display is determined to be the second special mode at a higher rate than the case where the first background mode is determined (see the double change final display mode determination table in FIG. 37). Therefore, after the background image changes to the second background mode having a high degree of expectation, the final display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage to be subjected to the background change effect changes to the first special mode having a low degree of expectation. The discouragement of the player due to this can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest can be prevented. That is, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation caused by the execution of the background change effect having a high degree of expectation from being impaired.

(N) Further, in this embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed after executing the background change effect for one hold memory, the background change effect is executed after the background change effect is executed. The execution timing of the holding change effect is determined according to the period until the variable display corresponding to the holding storage is executed (for example, the total number of holding storages at the time of the start winning). Specifically, based on the change timing determination table for double change shown in FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the change timing to be delayed as the total number of storages to be held at the time of the start winning is increased (hold display). The number of shifts is determined so that the number of shifts until the display mode changes to the final display mode increases). Accordingly, it is possible to execute the hold change effect at an appropriate timing within a period from when the background change effect is executed to when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the background change effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to appropriately increase the interest caused by the execution of the hold change effect after the execution of the background change effect.

(O) Further, in this embodiment, when a background change effect is executed after executing a background change effect for one hold memory, the background change effect is executed after the background change effect is executed. If the period until the variable display corresponding to the held storage is performed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, when the total number of stored storages at the time of starting winning is four), the background change effect is executed after the execution of the background change effect. Timing later than when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the background change effect is executed within the predetermined period (for example, when the total number of hold storage at the time of the start winning is three). To execute the pending change effect. More specifically, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the change timing to be slower as the total number of stored suspensions at the time of the start prize increases, based on the change timing determination table for double change shown in FIG. The number of shifts is determined so that the number of shifts until the display mode changes to the final display mode increases). For example, when the total number of stored reservations at the time of the start prize is three, the ratio of one shift is determined at 20% and the number of two shifts is determined at the ratio of 80%. In the case of, one shift is determined at a rate of 15%, two shifts are determined at a rate of 20%, and three shifts are determined at a rate of 65%. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the hold change effect at an appropriate timing within a period from when the background change effect is executed to when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage targeted for the background change effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to appropriately increase the interest caused by the execution of the hold change effect after the execution of the background change effect. For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the suspended change effect is executed immediately after the execution of the background change effect (for example, the case where the determined change timing (number of shifts) is 1), and the subject becomes a background change effect. In the variable display executed immediately before the variable display (target change), the rate at which the suspended change effect is executed can be increased, and the interest generated by the execution of the background change effect can be appropriately maintained.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the difference between the prefetching effect determination process, the pending change effect setting process, the double change effect setting process, the effect symbol change start process, and the effect symbol change stop process. The description will be focused on the points, and the description of the contents common to the first embodiment will be omitted. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the period in which the execution of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect or background change effect) is prohibited can be extended. That is, in the second embodiment, there may be a period in which the execution of the prefetching effect (holding change effect or background change effect) is prohibited even after the target change display ends.

  In the second embodiment, the look-ahead effect is executed until the variable display corresponding to all the hold memories stored in the hold storage means ends at the timing when the hold change effect or the background change effect is started. It is set to regulate. In the second embodiment, in the example described below, the timing at which the hold change effect is started is the timing at which the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode or a special mode other than the normal mode, or the suggestive effect ( (Success pattern) is the timing at which the variable display with the suggested effect is started. The timing at which the background change effect starts is the timing at which the background image of the first background mode or the second background mode is displayed on the effect display device 9, that is, the execution of the background change effect at the time of the start winning determination. This is the timing when the variable display executed immediately after the determination is started.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect determination process (the process of step S671 of the command analysis process (FIGS. 26 to 27)) (corresponding to FIG. 28 in the first embodiment). The prefetching effect determination process of this embodiment is different from the prefetching effect determining process of the first embodiment (FIG. 28) in that step S67101a is added after step S67101.

  If the hold change flag or the background change flag is not set in step S67101 (N in step S67101), effect control CPU 101 checks whether the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S67101a). This look-ahead prohibition flag is a flag indicating that execution of a look-ahead effect is prohibited, and is performed in step S67112b or S67114b of the later-described change-change effect setting process (FIG. 61), or effect symbol change start process (FIG. 62). This flag is set in step S1809c, S1814c, or S1826c, and is reset in step S854f of the effect symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 64). If the prefetch prohibition flag has not been set (N in step S67101a), the process proceeds to step S67102, and if the prefetch prohibition flag has been set (Y in step S67101a), the process proceeds to step S67105g. That is, in the second embodiment, even if neither the hold change flag nor the background change flag is set, if the prefetching prohibition flag is set, the hold storage (change It is not determined to execute the look-ahead effect (pending change effect or background change effect) for the display.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the pending change effect setting process (the process of step S67105d of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 28)) (corresponding to FIG. 30 in the first embodiment). In the hold change effect setting processing of this embodiment, the processing of steps S67112a and S67112b is added after step S67112, and the step The difference is that the processes of S67114a and S67114b are added.

  In the process of step S67112, after the new hold display is displayed in a special mode, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total hold storage number in the look-ahead prohibition counter (step S67112a), and sets the look-ahead prohibition flag (step S67112b). . Further, in the process of step S67114, after the new hold display is displayed in the final display mode of the first special mode or the second special mode, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total number of pending storages in the pre-reading prohibition counter (step S67114). S67114a), and sets a prefetch prohibition flag (step S67114b).

  The look-ahead prohibition counter is for indicating a period during which the look-ahead effect is prohibited, and is performed in step S67112a or S67114a of the above-described hold change effect setting process, or steps S1809b and S1814b of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 62). Or a counter which is set in S1826b and is decremented by 1 in step S1802b of the effect symbol variation start process (FIG. 62).

  FIGS. 62 and 63 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39 (corresponding to FIG. 41 in the first embodiment). Steps after S1831) are the same as those in FIG. 43 of the first embodiment. In the effect symbol variation start processing of this embodiment, steps S1802a and S1802b are added after step S1802, and step S1809a is performed before step S1812, as compared with the effect symbol variation start processing (FIG. 41) of the first embodiment. S1809c are added, steps S1814a to S1814c are added after step S1814, and steps S1826a to S1826c are added before step S1829.

  After step S1802, if the look-ahead prohibition flag is set (Y in step S1802a), effect controller CPU 101 decrements the value of the look-ahead prohibition counter by 1 (step S1802b). If the prefetching prohibition flag has been set by this process, it is decremented by one at the timing when the variation of the effect symbol starts.

  If only the hold change flag has been set (Y in step S1803), and if the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 after the processing in step S1808 (Y in step S1809), the effect control CPU 101 It is checked whether the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1809a). If the prefetch prohibition flag is set (Y in step S1809a), the process moves to step S1812. If the prefetch prohibition flag has not been set (N in step S1809a), the total pending storage count is set in the prefetch prohibition counter (step S1809b), the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1809c), and the flow shifts to step S1812. This is because, when it is determined that the holding change effect is to be executed at the time of the start winning, when the first look-ahead effect pattern is determined as the look-ahead effect pattern and the change timing is determined at a timing other than the time of winning, the shift number counter is set. This is for changing the display mode of the hold display to the special mode in the variable display in which the value of is 0. That is, when the change timing is determined to be a timing other than the winning in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the look-ahead prohibition flag is set at this timing when the display mode of the hold display changes from the normal mode, and the sum of the hold-ahead and the look-ahead prohibition counter is added. This sets the number of storages.

  If only the background change flag has been set (Y in step S1813), after the processing in step S1814, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the prefetch prohibition flag has been set (step S1814a). If the read-ahead prohibition flag has been set (Y in step S1814a), the process moves to step S1815. If the read-ahead prohibition flag has not been set (N in step S1814a), the total preservation prohibition counter is set to the total number of reserved storages (step S1814b), the read-ahead prohibition flag is set (step S1814c), and the flow shifts to step S1815. That is, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed at the timing of the start winning, the background mode is changed to the first background mode or the second background mode from the variable display executed immediately thereafter. Although it will change, in step S1814a, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display to be started is “variable display to be executed immediately after” based on whether or not the prefetch prohibition flag is set. If the pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (N in step S1814a), the pre-reading prohibition flag is set (step S1814a), assuming that the variable display to be started is "variable display executed immediately after". S1814c).

  If both the hold change flag and the background change flag are set (Y in step S1820) and the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 after the processing in step S1825 (Y in step S1826), The effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the pre-reading prohibition flag is set (step S1826a). If the pre-reading prohibition flag is set (Y in step S1826a), the process proceeds to step S1829. If the read-ahead prohibition flag has not been set (N in step S1826a), the total pending storage count is set in the pre-read prohibition counter (step S1826b), the pre-read prohibition flag is set (step S1826c), and the flow shifts to step S1829. This is because, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect and the background change effect at the time of the start winning, the first look-ahead effect pattern is determined as the look-ahead effect pattern, and the change timing is determined at a timing other than the time of the prize. This is for changing the display mode of the hold display to the special mode in the variable display in which the value of the number counter becomes 0. That is, when the change timing is determined to be a timing other than the winning in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the look-ahead prohibition flag is set at this timing when the display mode of the hold display changes from the normal mode, and the sum of the hold-ahead and the look-ahead prohibition counter is added. This sets the number of storages.

  In this way, at the timing when the hold change effect or the background change effect is started, the pre-read prohibition flag is set, and the total number of stored reservations at that time is set in the pre-read prohibition counter. Then, every time the variable display is executed thereafter, the value of the pre-reading prohibition counter is decremented by one (step 1802b).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process (FIG. 39) (corresponding to FIG. 47 in the first embodiment). The effect symbol variation stop processing of this embodiment is different from the effect symbol variation stop processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 47) in that steps S854d to S854f are added after step S854c.

  If the target change flag has not been set in step S854, or after the target change flag and the hold change flag or the background change flag (or both the hold change flag and the background change flag) have been reset, the effect control CPU 101 Then, it is determined whether or not the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S854d). If the read-ahead prohibition flag is set (Y in step S854d), and if the value of the read-ahead prohibition counter is 0 (Y in step S854e), the prefetch prohibition flag is reset. On the other hand, if the prefetch prohibition flag is not set (N in step S854d), or if the value of the prefetch prohibition counter is not 0 (that is, it is a value of 1 or more) (N in step S854e), the process proceeds to step S855. Move on to processing.

  By executing the above processing, (1) in the case where only the background change effect is executed, the look-ahead prohibition flag is set in step S1814c of the effect symbol change start process (FIG. 62), and the total hold storage at this time is set. A value corresponding to the number is set in the prefetch inhibition counter (step S1814b). Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead prohibition flag is restricted from the point of the effect symbol change start process when the background change effect is executed. Then, it is determined that the value of the look-ahead prohibition counter is 0 in step S854e of the effect symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 64) in the variation display corresponding to the last pending storage among the pending storages stored at this time. The look-ahead effect prohibition flag is reset (step S854f), and thereafter, the restriction on the execution of the look-ahead effect is released.

  Also, in the case of (2) a case where only the hold change effect is executed, the change timing is not 0 in the first look-ahead effect pattern, and in the case of a hold change effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes except at the time of winning, the effect is performed. When the value of the number-of-shifts counter becomes 0 in the symbol variation start process (FIG. 62) (when Y is determined in step S1809), the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1809c), and The corresponding value is set in the prefetch inhibition counter (step S1809b). Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead prohibition flag is restricted from the stage of the effect symbol change start process when the change of the display mode of the hold display (the suggestive effect (success pattern)) is executed in the hold change effect. Then, in the effect symbol change stop processing (FIG. 64) of the effect symbol change stop processing (FIG. 64) for the change display corresponding to the last hold storage among the hold memories stored at the start of the change display accompanied by the suggestion effect (success pattern). In, it is determined that the value of the look-ahead prohibition counter is 0, the look-ahead effect prohibition flag is reset (step S854f), and thereafter, the regulation of the execution of the look-ahead effect is released.

  (3) In the case where only the hold change effect is executed, and the change timing is 0 in the first look-ahead effect pattern, and the hold change effect is such that the display mode of the hold display becomes a special mode at the time of winning, the hold change effect is performed. In step S67114b of the effect setting process (FIG. 61), a prefetch prohibition flag is set, and a value corresponding to the total number of storages stored at this time (at the time of starting winning) is set in a prefetch prohibition counter (step S67114a). (4) In the case where only the holding change effect is executed, and in the case of the holding change effect in which the holding display mode is a special mode at the time of winning, the holding change effect setting process (FIG. 61) In step S67112b, the prefetching prohibition flag is set, and a value corresponding to the total number of stored storages at this time (at the time of starting winning) is set in the prefetching prohibition counter (step S67112a). Therefore, in these cases, the execution of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead prohibition flag is restricted from the time when the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the hold change effect. Then, among the holding memories stored at the time when the holding change effect setting process is executed (at the time when the holding display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode), the effect on the variable display corresponding to the last holding memory. In step S854e of the symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 64), the value of the prefetch prohibition counter is determined to be 0, the prefetch effect prohibition flag is reset (step S854f), and thereafter, the restriction on the execution of the prefetch effect is released. You.

  (5) In the case of executing both the notice effect of the hold change effect and the effect of the background change, the effect symbol change start when the hold change effect (the first look-ahead effect pattern whose change timing is not 0) is executed. When the value of the number-of-shifts counter becomes 0 in the process (FIG. 63) (when Y is determined in step S1826), the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1826c), and the value corresponding to the total number of pending storages at this time is set. Is set in the prefetch prohibition counter (step S1826b). Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead prohibition flag is restricted from the stage of the effect symbol change start process when the change of the display mode of the hold display (the suggestive effect (success pattern)) is executed in the hold change effect. Then, in the effect symbol change stop processing (FIG. 64) of the effect symbol change stop processing (FIG. 64) for the change display corresponding to the last hold storage among the hold memories stored at the start of the change display accompanied by the suggestion effect (success pattern). In, it is determined that the value of the look-ahead prohibition counter is 0, the look-ahead effect prohibition flag is reset (step S854f), and thereafter, the regulation of the execution of the look-ahead effect is released.

  By the processing as described above, in this embodiment, the background change effect is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means are executed when the hold change effect is started. It is restricted from being started. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest caused by the background change effect being started immediately after the hold change effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, by the processing as described above, when the background change effect is started, until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is executed, the hold change is performed. The production is restricted from starting. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest caused by the start of the hold change effect in succession after the background change effect.

  As above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. Lastly, a supplementary description of each embodiment will be given.

[3. Modification]
(1) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the first advance notice effect that allows the player to recognize the variable display to be the target of the look-ahead effect is a change-on-hold effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. The one announcement effect may be another effect such as a countdown effect, for example. In the countdown effect, an effect of notifying the variable display number until the target variable display is executed, such as “3”, “2”, “1”, or “0”, every time the variable display is executed (specifically, is executed). The process table for notifying the value of the shift number counter after the subtraction in step S1808 is selected), so that the player can execute the variable display to be the target of the prefetch effect several times later. It is possible to recognize whether the display is variable.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the second noticeable effect in which the variable display to be the target of the prefetch effect is more difficult to recognize than the first noticeable effect is a background change effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. Instead, the second announcement effect may be another effect such as a sound effect in which a special sound is output at the shift timing of the hold display (the timing of step 1800). In the sound effect, a special sound is output at the shift timing of the hold display, but the player cannot recognize which hold display (hold memory) the special sound corresponds to. As described above, in the second announcement effect, “it is difficult to recognize the variable display (holding storage) to be prefetched effect” means that the variable display (holding memory) to be prefetched effect cannot be substantially recognized. It is also included.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the first advancement effect that allows the player to recognize the target of the prefetching effect is only one of the hold change effects. Two effects, a change effect and a countdown effect, may be made executable. Further, in this case, two effects of a hold change effect and a countdown effect may be executed for one variable display (hold storage). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the target object of the look-ahead effect is more difficult to recognize than the first notice effect is the second notice effect is only one of the background change effects, but as the second notice effect, for example, Alternatively, two effects, a background change effect and a sound effect for outputting a special sound, may be made executable. Further, in this case, two effects of a background change effect and a sound effect may be executable for one variable display (holding storage).

(4) In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be performed at the time of the start winning, the background image is changed from the variable display started immediately after that (the first background mode or the second background mode). Although the example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and there may be a plurality of timings at which the background image changes, similarly to the timing at which the display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect changes. For example, the change timing of the background image may be determined in accordance with the total number of stored suspensions at the time of the start prize, and the result of the determination at the time of the start prize (whether a big hit or a super reach, or the like). The change timing of the background image may be determined according to the timing.

  Here, when it is possible to change the background image at the timing of the start winning (changing the background mode of the variable display executed at the time of the starting winning), it is possible to correspond to the newly displayed hold display. Although the player can understand that the background change effect is present, the new hold display is displayed or the hold display is shifted, so that the player can respond to any of the hold displays in the background change effect. It is difficult to recognize whether or not it has been done.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in the determination of the start winning that the holding change effect is to be executed for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning, the holding change flag is set and thereafter. For a predetermined period of time (for example, a period until the variable display targeted for the hold change effect ends), the execution of the background change effect targeting the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the hold change effect is performed. Although the example of prohibiting is described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and if it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed, a predetermined period thereafter, the predetermined ratio, but the hold change effect is executed. A background change effect for a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the hold change effect may be executed at a lower rate than when it is not determined.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning that the background change effect is to be executed for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning, the background change flag is set and thereafter. (For example, a period until the end of the variable display targeted for the background change effect), the execution of the hold change effect targeted for the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the background change effect Although the example in which the background change effect is prohibited has been described, the present invention is not limited to this mode. A hold change effect may be executed at a lower rate than in the case where it is not determined, for a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the background change effect.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in the start winning determination that the holding change effect is to be performed on the variable display corresponding to the starting winning, the holding change flag is set, and thereafter, (For example, a period until the variable display targeted for the hold change effect ends) is a hold change effect and background for a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the hold change effect. Although the example in which the execution of both look-ahead effects of the change effect is prohibited has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect Only the execution of the background change effect targeted for the variable display different from the variable display targeted for is prohibited, and the hold for the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the hold change effect is prohibited. Of production may be as executable. Then, when a hold change effect is performed on a variable display that is different from the variable display targeted for the hold change effect, the change is higher than when a hold change effect is not performed on the different variable display. The background change effect may be executed at a ratio.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in the determination of the start winning that the background change effect is to be performed for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning, the background change flag is set and thereafter. (For example, a period until the variable display targeted for the background change effect ends) is a hold change effect and a background targeted for a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the background change effect. Although the example in which the execution of both of the pre-reading effects of the change effect is prohibited has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed, the background change effect is performed for a predetermined period thereafter. The prohibition of only the execution of the pending change effect targeting the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the background display, and the background targeting the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the background change effect. Of production may be as executable. When the background change effect is performed on a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the background change effect, the background change effect is higher than when the background change effect is not performed on the different variable display. The hold change effect may be executed at a ratio.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, at the timing of the start winning, it is determined that both the hold change effect and the background change effect for the hold memory (variable display) corresponding to the start winning are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the determination at the time of the start winning, and when the variable display is started, at the timing, Whether or not to execute the background change effect may be determined based on the determination result at the time of starting winning corresponding to the stored hold storage. For example, all the prize-winning determination result designation commands stored in the post-shift prize-winning command storage area are checked, and a variable display corresponding to any one of the prize-winning determination result designation commands (for example, the super-reach determination result) is displayed. You may make it determine to perform a background change effect as an object.

  In such a case, the variable display determined to execute the hold change effect at the time of the start winning is set as the target of the background change effect at the timing when the variable display prior to the variable display is started. Although it may be determined, the background change effect of the variable display determined to execute the hold change effect at the start winning is higher than the variable display determined not to execute the hold change effect at the start win. Should be determined so as to be executed. By doing in this way, the frequency with which the hold change effect is executed after the background change effect is executed for one variable display can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

(10) Also, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the background change effect in the determination of the start winning, and when the variable display is started, the starting winning corresponding to the hold storage stored at that timing. Whether or not to execute the hold change effect may be determined based on the determination result of the time. For example, all the prize-winning determination result designation commands stored in the post-shift prize-winning command storage area are checked, and a variable display corresponding to any one of the prize-winning determination result designation commands (for example, the super-reach determination result) is displayed. It may be determined to execute a pending change effect as a target.

  In such a case, the variable display determined to execute the background change effect at the time of the winning start may be set as a target of the hold change effect at the timing when the variable display prior to the variable display is started. Although there is a possibility that it will be determined, for the variable display that is determined to execute the background change effect at the start winning prize, the hold change effect is higher than the variable display determined to not execute the background change effect at the start winning prize. Should be determined so as to be executed. By doing in this way, the frequency with which the hold change effect is executed after the background change effect is executed for one variable display can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

(11) In the above embodiment, the background mode when the background change effect is executed is determined according to the display result of the variable display (“outside”, “normal big hit / probable change big hit”, “sudden probable change big hit / small hit”). However, the background mode when the background change effect is executed may be determined according to the type of big hit. For example, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the rate at which the first background mode is selected is 80%, the rate at which the second background mode is selected is 20%, and when the jackpot type is a probable big hit, The ratio of selecting the first background mode may be 20%, and the ratio of selecting the second background mode may be 80%. Further, in the case of a big hit in the variable display of the second background mode, the big hit type may be set to a certain variable big hit.

  Also, for example, a 5R jackpot of 5 rounds (for example, opening of a special winning opening with a maximum opening time of 29 seconds at maximum of 5 times) and 15 rounds (for example, opening time of 29 seconds at maximum) If there is a 15R jackpot of 15R jackpots, and the jackpot type is 5R jackpot, the ratio of selecting the first background mode is 80%, and the second background mode is selected. If the selected ratio is 20% and the jackpot type is 15R big hit, the ratio of selecting the first background mode is set to 20% and the ratio of selecting the second background mode is set to 80%. May be. Further, in the case of a big hit in the variable display of the second background mode, the big hit type may always be set to the 15R big hit.

  As described above, there are a plurality of types of specific game states, such as a first specific game state having a low advantage such as a normal big hit and a 5R big hit, and a second specific game state having a high advantage for a player such as a probable big hit and a 15R big hit. In such a case, the possibility of entering the first specific game state or the possibility of entering the second specific game state may be indicated in accordance with the background mode of the background change effect.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the start condition (for example, the variable display is not executed and the big hit game state is not controlled) is established for the variable display (hold storage), the variable display (hold) Although the example in which the hold display (first hold display) corresponding to (memory) is deleted has been described, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold storage) in which the start condition is satisfied is not limited to such a form. The display may be shifted to the variable display corresponding display area and displayed as a variable display corresponding display (so-called active suspension) until the variable display is completed. Here, when the suspended display shifts to the variable display corresponding display area, the display mode of the suspended display is maintained. That is, when the hold display is in the normal mode, the variable display corresponding display corresponding to the hold display is also displayed in the normal mode, and when the hold display is in the special mode, the display corresponding to the hold display is performed. The variable display corresponding display is also displayed in a special mode. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the variable display serving as the target of the pending change effect is being executed, and can pay attention to the state of the variable display and the display result.

  Here, in the above-described embodiment, a restriction is made so that a new look-ahead effect is not executed until the variable display of the target is completed. Thus, the variable display corresponding display is displayed in the variable display corresponding display area as described above. In this case, when the variable display corresponding display in the special mode is displayed (that is, when the variable display of the target of the hold change effect is executed), a new look-ahead effect is not executed. Therefore, the above-described embodiment is also effective in a mode in which a variable display corresponding display is displayed.

(13) In the above embodiment, even when the variable display that is the target of the background change effect is executed, the background image becomes the background mode (the first background mode or the second background mode) in the background change effect. Although the example has been described (FIGS. 55 (18) and (19) and FIGS. 56 (59) and (60)), the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the background image in the variable display serving as the target of the background change effect is the background change. It may not be the background mode in the effect, and may be a normal background.

(14) In the above embodiment, at the timing when the big hit game state ends (for example, after the determination in Step S886 of the big hit end effect processing is YES and before Step S892 is executed), the hold change flag and the background change flag are set. May be reset. Further, in the second embodiment, the prefetch prohibition flag may be reset. That is, the restriction on the prefetching effect may be released when the big hit gaming state ends.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed, even if the timing is before the hold change effect is executed, the change display of the target of the hold change effect is Although the example in which it is not determined to execute the background change effect for the different variable display has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in the case where it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect is determined. Can be determined to execute a background change effect targeting a variable display different from the variable display of the target of the hold change effect, but after the hold change effect is executed. At the timing of, the determination to execute the background change effect on the variable display different from the change display of the target of the hold change effect (or the execution of the background change effect) may be limited.

(16) In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed, the variation display of the background change effect is not performed even at the timing before the background change effect is executed. Although an example in which it is not determined to execute the pending change effect targeting different variable displays has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when it is determined to execute the background change effect, the background change effect Can be determined to execute a pending change effect targeting a variable display different from the variable display of the background change effect, but after the background change effect has been executed. At the timing of, the determination to execute the hold change effect (or the execution of the hold change effect) for the change display different from the change display of the background change effect may be limited.

(17) In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed, even if the timing is before the hold change effect is executed, the change display of the target of the hold change effect is Although an example is described in which it is not determined to execute a pending change effect or a background change effect targeting a different variable display, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when it is determined to execute a pending change effect, At the timing before the hold change effect is executed, it is possible to determine to execute a hold change effect or a background change effect that targets a change display different from the change display of the target of the hold change effect (according to the determination). (A pending change effect or a background change effect can be executed).

  For example, the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect according to the previous determination is the first special mode (low expectation), and the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect according to the subsequent determination is the second special mode. In the case of the mode (high expected degree), the pending change effect according to the subsequent decision may be executed without executing the pending change effect according to the previous decision. Also, for example, the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect according to the previous determination is the first special mode (low expectation), and the background mode in the background change effect according to the subsequent determination is the second background mode ( In the case of (high expected degree), the background change effect according to the later decision may be executed without executing the pending change effect according to the previous decision. As described above, the type of the notice effect and the target of the notice effect may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the notice effect.

  In addition, for example, the display result of the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect according to the previous determination is incorrect, and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect or the background change effect according to the subsequent determination is a big hit. In the case of, the hold change effect or the background change effect according to the later decision may be executed without executing the hold change effect according to the previous decision. As described above, the type of the preview effect and the target of the preview effect may be changed according to the display result of the variable display that is the target of the preview effect.

(18) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed, even if the timing is before the background change effect is executed, the change display of the target of the background change effect is Although an example in which it is not determined to execute a pending change effect or a background change effect targeting a different change display has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when it is determined to execute a background change effect, At the timing before the background change effect is executed, it is possible to determine to execute a hold change effect or a background change effect targeting a variable display different from the variable display of the target of the background change effect (according to the determination). (A pending change effect or a background change effect can be executed).

  For example, the background mode in the background change effect according to the previous determination is the first background mode (low expectation), and the background mode in the background change effect according to the subsequent determination is the second background mode (high expectation). In this case, the background change effect according to the later decision may be executed without executing the background change effect according to the previous decision. Further, for example, the background mode in the background change effect according to the previous determination is the first background mode (low expectation), and the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect according to the subsequent determination is the second special mode ( If the degree of expectation is high, the background change effect according to the previous decision may not be executed, and the pending change effect according to the later decision may be executed. As described above, the type of the notice effect and the target of the notice effect may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the notice effect.

  In addition, for example, the display result of the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect according to the previous determination is incorrect, and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the pending change effect or the background change effect according to the subsequent determination is a big hit. In the case of, the hold change effect or the background change effect according to the later decision may be executed without executing the hold change effect according to the previous decision. As described above, the type of the preview effect and the target of the preview effect may be changed according to the display result of the variable display that is the target of the preview effect.

(19) In the above embodiment, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect in the determination at the time of the start winning, even after the determination and before the hold change effect is executed, the timing is not changed. The example in which the background change effect is not determined to be executed for the change display of the target of the hold change effect and the common change display has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. When it is determined that the effect is to be performed, the timing after the determination and before the holding change effect is executed (for example, the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process after the start winning according to the previous determination). Then, it may be possible to determine to execute a background change effect that targets a variable display common to the change display of the hold change effect (a background change effect can be executed according to the determination). .

  For example, the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect according to the previous determination is the first special mode (low expectation), and the background mode in the background change effect according to the subsequent determination is the second background mode (expectation degree). In the case of (high), the background change effect according to the subsequent decision may be executed without executing the pending change effect according to the previous determination for the variable display. As described above, the type of the notice effect for one variable display may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the notice effect. It should be noted that the execution timing of the preview effect (the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes or the timing at which the mode of the background image changes) for one variable display may be changed in accordance with the degree of expectation of the preview effect. good.

(20) In the above embodiment, when it is determined to perform the background change effect in the determination at the time of the start winning, even if the timing is after the determination and before the background change effect is performed, the timing is not changed. Although an example in which it is not determined to execute the hold change effect that targets the change display of the target of the background change effect and the common change display has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the background change is determined by the determination at the time of the start winning. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the timing after the determination and before the execution of the background change effect (for example, the effect symbol change start process or the effect symbol change process after the start winning according to the previous determination). Then, it may be possible to determine to execute a hold change effect targeting a change display common to the background change effect target (a hold change effect can be executed according to the determination). .

  For example, the background mode in the background change effect according to the previous determination is the first background mode (low expectation), and the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect according to the subsequent determination is the second special mode (expectation level). In the case of (High), the change display may be executed without executing the background change effect according to the previous determination, but executing the hold change effect according to the subsequent determination. As described above, the type of the notice effect for one variable display may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the notice effect. It should be noted that the execution timing of the preview effect (the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes or the timing at which the mode of the background image changes) for one variable display may be changed in accordance with the degree of expectation of the preview effect. good.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that the first announcement effect is to be executed, the second announcement effect of the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the first announcement effect is performed. When the execution is restricted (for example, the execution of the second preview effect is not determined until the variable display targeted for the first preview effect is finished), and when the execution of the second preview effect is determined, In addition, the execution of the first preview effect for a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the second preview effect is restricted (for example, the first display effect is not changed until the variable display targeted for the second preview effect ends). The example in which the execution of the advance notice effect is not determined) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Is a 2nd announcement for different variable displays When the execution is restricted (for example, the execution of the second preview effect is not determined until the variable display to be the target of the first preview effect is completed), if the execution of the second preview effect is determined, The execution of the first announcement effect for a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the second announcement effect is not limited (for example, even if the background change flag is set, the suspended change effect is not executed). May be determined to be executed).

  Further, when it is determined to execute the second announcement effect, the execution of the first announcement effect for the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the second announcement effect is limited (for example, However, the execution of the first advance effect is not determined until the variable display to be the target of the second advance effect is completed.) If the first advance effect is decided to be executed, the first advance effect is not determined. The execution of the second announcement effect targeting the variable display different from the target variable display is not restricted (for example, it is possible to determine that the background change effect is executed even during the period in which the hold change flag is set. Yes).

(22) In the above-described embodiment, an example will be described in which, when the first notice effect is executed, the execution of the second notice effect is restricted until the variable display targeted for the first notice effect ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the execution restriction of the second announcement effect may be released based on the condition that the start of the variable display to be the first announcement effect is satisfied. For example, when the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is deleted, so that even if the background change effect is executed at a later timing, the background change effect is executed. The interest of change production is not lost.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, an example will be described in which, when the second preview effect is executed, the execution of the first advance effect is restricted until the variable display targeted for the second advance effect ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the execution restriction of the first announcement effect may be released based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display to be the target of the second announcement effect is satisfied. For example, in a variable display that is a target of a background change effect, when the background images are not the first background image and the second background image (when the background image in the target variable display is not the target of the background change effect) Since the background image in the variable display is in the normal background mode, the interest of the background change effect is not spoiled even if the hold change effect is executed at a timing thereafter.

(24) In the above-described embodiment, (1) the rate at which the first advance effect is executed when the second advance effect is executed for one hold storage (determined to execute the double change effect) Ratio / [the ratio determined to execute the double change effect + the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect]) is when the second notice effect is not executed for one hold memory. When the first noticeable effect is higher than the ratio at which the first noticeable effect is executed (the ratio determined to execute only the hold change effect), and (2) when the second noticeable effect is executed for one hold memory The ratio at which the first notice effect is executed (the ratio determined to execute the double change effect / [the ratio determined to execute the double change effect + the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect]) is , Target one pending memory Then, when the second announcement effect is executed, the ratio at which the first announcement effect is not executed (the ratio determined to execute only the background change effect / [the ratio determined to execute the double change effect + the background change] Although the example described above is higher than the ratio determined to execute only the effect], the present invention is not limited to the mode in which both the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied at the same time, and either (1) or (2) A form in which only one of the conditions is satisfied may be employed.

(25) In the above-described embodiment, in the case where the notice effect of both the hold change effect and the background change effect is executed for one variable display (hold memory), the larger the total number of hold memory at the time of the start winning is, Although the example in which the rate of change timing being late (the number of shifts being increased) is high has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the fluctuation specified by the past prize-winning-judgment-result specifying command stored at the time of starting prize-winning. The change timing may be determined according to the pattern. For example, when there is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach effect, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is relatively long, so that the display mode of the hold display in the fluctuation display executed immediately after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern is changed. If there is no fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the fluctuation display executed immediately before the target fluctuation display is performed in order to secure a period in which the aspect of the background image is changing for a certain period. , The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a special mode.

  That is, the “period from the execution of the background change effect to the execution of the hold change effect” is the number of variable display times required from the execution of the background change effect to the execution of the hold change effect (for example, May be determined according to the time required from the execution of the background change effect to the execution of the hold change effect after the start of the background change effect. It may be something. For example, when the total number of pending storages at the timing when the background change production is executed is three, the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time corresponding to each of the three pending storages, and If the change time corresponding to the second hold storage is shorter than the predetermined time, the change display corresponding to the third hold storage is performed without executing the hold change effect in the change display corresponding to the second hold storage. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold change effect is to be executed, and the change time corresponding to the first hold memory is longer than a predetermined time, the hold change effect is executed in the change display corresponding to the second hold memory. May be determined.

(26) In the second embodiment described above, (1) when the display mode of the hold display becomes a special mode or a special mode, and (2) when a suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed, the suggestion effect From the timing at which the variable display is started, and (3) the timing at which the background image is changed to the first background mode or the second background mode, the variable display corresponding to all the hold storages at the timing. The example in which the period until the end (the period in which the prefetch prohibition flag is set) is not determined to execute the prefetch effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the above (1) to (3) Until the variable display of the upper limit value (for example, 8 in the above embodiment) of the number of reserved storages is executed from any of the timings, it is not determined to execute the prefetch effect. It may be so. For example, it may be determined that neither the hold change effect nor the background change effect is performed until the variable display started at the eighth after the timings (1) to (3) ends.

(27) In the above-described embodiment, (A) executing only the hold change effect, (B) executing only the background change effect, or ( C) The example of determining whether to execute both the holding change effect and the background change effect (double change effect) has been described. (D) to determine whether or not to execute the pending change effect, and then to (E) to determine whether to execute the background change effect with respect to the one pending storage. You may do it. In such a mode, it is determined to execute the background change effect at a higher rate when it is determined to execute the hold change effect than when it is determined not to execute the hold change effect. It is good to do. Note that the determinations of (D) and (E) are not limited to those performed at the time of the start winning. For example, the determination of (D) is performed at the timing of the start winning, but the variable display is started for the determination of (E). It may be performed at the timing.

  Conversely, at the time of the starting prize, for the one hold storage (variable display), it is first determined (F) whether or not to execute the background change effect, and then the one hold memory is stored. It may be determined whether or not to execute the (G) hold change effect as an object. In such a form, it is determined to execute the pending change effect at a higher rate when it is determined to execute the background change effect than when it is determined not to execute the background change effect. It is good to do. Note that the determination of (F) and (G) is not limited to the determination made at the time of the start winning. For example, the determination of (F) is performed at the timing of the start winning, but the variable display is started for the determination of (G). It may be performed at the timing. As described above, the order and timing of determining whether to execute the pending change effect and determining whether to execute the background change effect are not limited.

  In this embodiment, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is the timing of the start winning, and the display is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include other timings. For example, at an arbitrary timing until the display of the variable of the notice is started (specifically, during one variable display executed before the display of the variable of the notice is started, or during a period spanning a plurality of variable displays. ), The hold display may be displayed in a special mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is only the timing of the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display may be changed and displayed in a special mode at an arbitrary shift timing, or at an arbitrary timing until the display of the change of the notice object is started (specifically, the change display of the notice object is started. The suspended display may be displayed in a special mode during one variable display executed until the display is performed or during a period spanning a plurality of variable displays. Further, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the special mode is not limited to the shift timing. Any timing before the start (specifically, during one variable display or a period spanning a plurality of variable displays executed until the variable display of the notice target is started) may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the effect pattern of the hold change effect, the hold display corresponding to the fluctuating display (hold memory) to be notified is not once displayed in the special mode, but is displayed in the first special mode of the final display mode. The first look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the mode or the second special mode and the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) to be announced at the timing of the start winning are displayed in the special mode, and the final display is performed at an arbitrary shift timing. It includes the second prefetch effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the display mode, but may include only the second prefetch effect pattern. Even in this case, when the holding change effect is performed, the holding display corresponding to the variable display (holding storage) to be notified is once displayed in a special mode. Since it is changed at a timing (arbitrary timing such as a shift timing), it is possible to provide a variety of effects for changing the display mode of the hold display, and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

  In this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold display is always changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. It may not be changed as it is. In this case, the holding display is not changed from the special mode to the special mode, and when the variable display corresponding to the holding display (holding storage) is started, compared to when the special mode is changed to the special mode. It is desirable to configure so that the ratio of big hits is reduced. By doing so, more attention can be given to the change of the display mode of the hold display from the special mode to the special mode. Further, in this case, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is higher than the state in which the hold display is displayed in the normal state, and the ratio of the display being changed to the special mode is higher. It is desirable to do. By doing so, it is possible to give an interest to the change of the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectation when the display mode is displayed in the special mode. .

  In this embodiment, a predetermined display control is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggestive effect, but with (or instead of) the effect of outputting sound from a speaker or turning on a lamp. It may also be possible to perform an effect such as causing the user to perform an action. Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect that acts on a change in the hold display (an arrow is pierced (or passes)), and the hold display changes according to the effect result. The display may change), and the effect does not necessarily have to affect the change of the hold display. For example, in both the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed and the case where the display mode is not changed, an effect in which an arrow sticks into a specific hold display is performed as a suggestive effect. Then, when changing the hold display, the hold display with the arrow stuck may be changed by the suggestion effect, and when not changed, the hold display with the arrow stuck may not be changed by the suggestion effect. That is, when the hold display changes and when the hold display does not change, the mode of the suggested effect (the flying arrow pierces a specific hold display) is the same, but the result (the display mode of the hold display with the arrow pierced is the same). (Change or not) may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, “different ratios” means not only those having different ratios in a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 40%: 60%. It is a concept that also includes ones having different ratios in a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command directly to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 uses another board (for example, FIG. 3). Or a sound / lamp board having a function provided by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 and a function provided by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The control command may be transmitted to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control board 80 via another board. In this case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control unit such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control unit may receive the command. In response to this, control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the effect display device 9 by changing the received command as it is or, for example, to a simplified command. May be transmitted. Even in this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time, a type of a reach effect, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-run, when the variation is started, 1 Although the example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command is used to determine the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after 2 stops) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the microcomputer 100 for production control selects the specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing. It may be. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. As described above, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, the configuration described in the above embodiment can be applied to various types of gaming machines, not limited to pachinko gaming machines. For example, the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments may be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine. An enclosed circulation type pachinko machine has a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine enclosed in an enclosed area (for example, a pachinko machine), and a game area provided in the pachinko machine. In order to fire game balls through the game area, collect the game balls via the collecting area (for example, each winning opening, out port, foul ball return port), and fire the collected game balls again in the game area. In the enclosed area. Further, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, when there is a winning in each winning opening, a point corresponding to the number of award balls is added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the award ball. Processing is performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is used as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is applied to a case where a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of gaming machines are operated in accordance with the operation of the operating lever by the player. When a combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 production display device 13 1st starting winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 special variable winning prize ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 game control microcomputer 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding storage;
Determining means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied,
First announcement effect execution means for executing a first announcement effect capable of recognizing a variable display to be an object of the announcement effect prior to the execution of the variable display, as an announcement effect based on a result of the determination by the determination means; ,
A second preview effect executing means for executing, as the preview effect, a second preview effect in which the variable display to be the target of the preview effect is more difficult to recognize than the first preview effect before the variable display is executed; And
The rate at which the first advance effect is executed when the second advance effect is executed for one variable display is determined by the ratio when the second advance effect is executed for one variable display. 1 Higher than the rate at which the notice effect is not executed,
In the first preview effect and the second preview effect for one variable display, the timing at which the execution of the first preview effect is started is different from the timing at which the execution of the second preview effect is started. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that: Further comprising a hold information display means for displaying the hold information corresponding to the hold storage,
The display mode of the suspension information includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, a first special mode and a second special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode,
The first notice effect execution means is configured to display the hold information in a different ratio in the first special mode or the second special mode according to a result of the determination by the determination means as the first notice effect. Executable, and in the suspension notice effect, it is possible to change the suspension information from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: